RAOB

The Complete RAwinsonde OBservation Program

A product of Eosonde Research Services, LLC

User Guide & Technical Manual

Version 7.0
Note: This document contains information regarding all available program modules & options.

Copyright (C) 1994-2022. All rights reserved.

Portions(C) 1982-2000 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.
RAOB License Agreement
The user must comply with the following agreement with
Eosonde Research Services, LLC (ERS) in order to use this software.

SINGLE USER. ERS grants the single user the License to use the RAOB software program on a single
computer (single CPU) at a single location. Each workstation, upon which the software is used, whether
such workstation is a stand-alone computer or a networked computer, must have a separately licensed
copy of this software.

SITE LICENSE. ERS grants the user the right to use the number of copies of the RAOB software for
which payment has been made. For each additional site license purchased, the user may operate that
number of additional program copies in addition to the single user copy. For example, if 4 additional site
licenses are purchased, a maximum of 5 simultaneous RAOB programs can operate at the same time on
different stand-alone computers, or up to 5 users can access the RAOB program from a networked
computer server.

TRANSFERS. You may physically transfer this software from one of your computers to another computer
provided that the software is used on only one computer at a time. You may not distribute copies of this
software or accompanying written materials to others. You may not transfer this software to anyone
without the prior written consent of ERS. In no event may you transfer, assign, rent, lease, sell or
otherwise dispose of this software on a temporary basis.

TERMINATION. This license is effective until terminated. This license will terminate automatically without
notice from ERS if you fail to comply with any provision of this license. Upon termination you shall destroy
the written materials and all copies of this software, including modified copies, if any.

COPYRIGHT

RAOB is registered with the United States Copyright Office in accordance with Title 17 of the United
States Code, and cannot be sold for profit without the author's explicit written permission.

DISCLAIMER

The RAOB program is distributed without warranty of any kind, expressed or implied. The author
assumes no liability for damages, direct or consequential, which may result from the use of this program.
Standardized algorithms are used wherever possible for data processing. There are several output
parameters that use only one of potentially many methods of derivation. These output data should be
used with caution and must not be interpreted as definitive solutions.

PROGRAM SUPPORT

Eosonde Research Services, LLC

7791 SE 168th Lone Oak Loop
The Villages, FL 32162

Phone: (352) 693-2541

E-mail: [email protected]
WEB: http://www.raob.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 Program Overview
1.2 Data Overview
1.3 Program Modules

2. SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . 6
2.1 Computers
2.2 Printers
2.3 Software
2.4 Program Files

3. GETTING STARTED . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.1 Program Installation
3.2 Plot a Sounding
3.3 Station Data

4. SOUNDING DIAGRAM (Menu Bar) . . . . 7

4.1 File
- Encoders
- Downloading Data
- Batch & Timer Processing
- Exporting
4.2 Edit
4.3 Displays
- Sounding Display
- Sounding Scanner & Sequencer
- Custom View
- Severe & Winter Weather
- Fire/AQ Weather
- Tropical Weather
- Soundingram {see Section 17}
- Layer Analyzer
- Frontal Analysis {see Section 21}
- Hodograph
- Hodogram (3-D)
- Cross-Section {see Section 18}
- Mountain-Wave {see Section 19}
- Soaring
4.4 Listings
4.5 Analyze (Toolbar & Hazards)
4.6 Merge
4.7 Refresh (& Restore)
4.8 Zoom (& Un-Zoom)
4.9 Compare
4.10 Options
- Diagram Options
- Program Options
- Loop Options
- Weather Alert Editor
- Severe Weather Table Options
- Fog Index Table
- Cloud Table Options
- Start Diagnostic Log
- Password
5. DIAGRAM CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . 63
5.1 Format
5.2 Pressure & Temperature
5.3 Adiabats
5.4 Sounding Data
5.5 Analyses Data
5.6 Hodograph
5.7 Displays
5.8 Height Lines
5.9 Temperature Lines

6. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . 76
6.1 Display Preferences
6.2 Algorithm Options
6.3 Parcel Lifting & CAPE
6.4 System Configuration
6.5 Dates & Fonts
6.6 Data Processing

7. WEATHER ALERT EDITOR . . . . . . . . . 88

8. SEVERE WEATHER PARAMETER TABLE . . 90

9. FOG INDEX TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

10. CLOUD LAYER TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . 95

11. DATA DECODERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

11.1 Basic Module Decoders

11.1.1 CSV Data
11.1.2 Raw Data
11.1.3 WMO Coded Data
11.1.4 SHARP Modified Data
11.1.5 BUFKIT Data
11.1.6 University of Wyoming (UWYO) Data

11.2 Special Data Decoders Module

11.3 Binary (BUFR / GRIB / netCDF) Decoders Module
11.4 Sodar/Lidar/Radar Decoder Module
11.5 Aerosol Decoders Module
11.6 Radiometer Decoder Module
11.7 Doppler Decoder/Display Module

12. DeCODED (raw) DATA EDITOR . . . . . . . 104

12.1 Station Data
12.2 Pressure & Temperature Data
12.3 Height & Wind Data

13. DATA PROCESSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

13.1 Coded Data
13.2 Raw Data
13.3 Data Quality Checks
13.4 Numerical Analyses
14. SIGNIFICANT LEVELS . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
14.1 Lifting Condensation Level (LCL)
14.2 Convective Condensation Level (CCL)
14.3 Level of Free Convection (LFC)
14.4 Lifted Parcel Level (LPL)
14.5 Equilibrium Level (EL)
14.6 Maximum Parcel Level (MPL)
14.7 Wet Bulb Zero (WBZ)
14.8 Tropopause(s)

15. SOUNDING INDICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

15.1 Boyden Index
15.2 Bulk Richardson Number (BRN)
15.3 CAP
15.4 Craven SigSvr Parameter
15.5 Cross Totals (CT)
15.6 Deep Convective Index (DCI)
15.7 Delta Theta-E
15.8 Dry Microburst Potential (DMP) Gust
15.9 Dry Microburst Potential Index (DMPI)
15.10 Energy Helicity Index (EHI)
15.11 Flooding
15.12 Fog Stability Index (FSI)
15.13 Fog Point
15.14 Fog Threat
15.15 GOES Hybrid Microburst Index (HMI)
15.16 Haines Index
15.17 Heat Burst Index
15.18 Humidity Index
15.19 Jefferson Index (JI)
15.20 K Index
15.21 KO Index
15.22 Lifted Index (LI)
15.23 Maximum Vertical Velocity (MVV)
15.24 Microburst Day Potential Index (MDPI)
15.25 Richardson Index (Ri)
15.26 S Index
15.27 Severity (thunderstorm severity index)
15.28 SHERB Index
15.29 Showalter Index (SI)
15.30 Significant Hail Parameter (SHIP)
15.31 Significant Tornado Parameter (STP)
15.32 Supercell Composite Parameter (SCP)
15.33 SWEAT Index
1
15.34 T Gust
2
15.35 T Gust
15.36 Temperature Heat Index (THI)
15.37 Thompson Index (TI)
15.38 Tropical Cyclone Tornado Parameters: Tornado~TC
TCTP~UNC
15.39 Total Totals (TT)
15.40 TQ Index
15.41 Ventilation Index
15.42 Vertical Totals (VT)
15.43 Violent Tornado Parameter (VTP)
15.44 Vorticity Generation Parameter (VGP)
15.45 Warm Cloud Depth (WCD)
15.46 Water Vapor (IWV & LWP)
15.47 Waterspout Indexes: Charleston, NWS
Szilagyi (SWI)
Key West, NWS
15.48 Wet Microburst Severity Index (WMSI)
15.49 WINDEX
15.50 Wind-Chill Index

16. SOUNDING ANALYSES . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

16.1 CAPE
16.2 Contrails
16.3 Convective Temperature (Tc)
16.4 Corfidi MSC Vectors
16.5 Downrush Temperature
16.6 Fog Layers
16.7 Hail
16.8 Icing
16.9 Inversions
16.10 Lightning Potential
16.11 Liquid Water Content (LWC)
16.12 Low-Level Wind Shear (LLWS)
16.13 Potential Vorticity Units (PVU)
16.14 Precipitable Water
16.15 Refractivity (N & K units)
16.16 Storm Motion Prediction (& Helicity)
16.17 Turbulence

17. SOUNDINGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

17.1 Soundingram Screen
17.2 Soundingram Configuration
17.3 Advanced Soundingram module

18. CROSS-SECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

18.1 Cross-Section Screen
18.2 Cross-Section File Menu
18.3 Cross-Section Creation
18.4 Cross-Section Editing
18.5 Cross-Section Display Options
18.6 Cross-Section Configuration
18.7 Cross-Section Mouse & Click Operations
18.8 Cross-Section Analyses
18.9 Interpolation of a Cross-Section Sounding
18.10 Composite Sounding Map
18.11 Advanced Cross-Section module
18.12 Gradient Editor
18.13 Real-Time Data Processor module

19. MOUNTAIN WAVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

19.1 Wave Turbulence Overview
19.2 Wave Turbulence Method
19.3 Mountain Wave Screen
19.4 Mountain Wave & Froude Number Display
19.5 Mountain Wave Diagram Options
19.6 Mountains & Parameter Definitions
19.7 Mountain Data
19.8 Mountain Wave Display Options
19.9 Wave Decay
19.10 Mountain Wave Computations
19.11 Wave Turbulence Categories
19.12 Double Mountains

20. SOARING CALCULATIONS . . . . . . . . . 180

21. FRONTAL ANALYSES . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

21.1 Overview
21.2 Thermal Wind Theory
21.3 Thermal Wind Equation
21.4 Frontal Analysis Screen
21.5 Frontal Selection
21.6 Frontal Analysis Configuration
21.7 Hodo-Front Manual Screen

22. FORECAST SOUNDINGS . . . . . . . . . . 190

22.1 Overview
22.2 Single Station Forecasting
22.3 Multi Station Forecasting
22.4 Forecast Maximum Surface Temperature

23. CUSTOM VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

24. RAW DATA FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

25. CSV DATA FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

26. REFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

27. INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

1

GENERAL DESCRIPTION.

1.1 Program Overview. RAOB is a multi-functional, fully interactive sounding analysis program,
capable of decoding data from standard WMO formats and many commonly used commercial and
institutional formats. RAOB can plot soundings reaching up to 0.001 mb and containing thousands of data
levels per sounding. Data files containing multiple soundings can be automatically looped for quick
viewing. Temperature profiles and wind plots can be interactively modified as analyses data/graphics
simultaneously update. Soundings are plotted on Skew-T, Emagram, or Tephigram diagrams, upon which
several sounding parameters can be alphanumerically displayed, while others are graphically overlaid.
Graphic overlays include: icing (clear & rime), clouds, clear air turbulence, mountain-wave turbulence, low-
level wind shear, thermal turbulence, energy/buoyancy areas, inversions, frontal layers, lightning, contrails,
and more. The sounding's wet-bulb and virtual temperature profiles can also be overlaid. There are
numerous computational options, including turbulence and icing algorithms, and even an option for
automatic or manual cloud layer data. RAOB has options for analytical comparison of two soundings or
simultaneous overlays of up to five soundings. Alphanumeric data displays include, hail size, surface gust
potential, SWEAT, TT, LI, K-index, helicity, CAPE, EHI, and many others. All significant level data (LCL,
CCL, LFC, & associated ELs) are listed, including the option to graphically label each level and plot parcel
lifting sequences. Diagram options include temperature scaling in °F, °C , or °Κ; while vertical scaling
options include pressure (mb or hPa), kilometers, feet, or miles. Special “severe weather”, “winter
weather”, "fire/air-quality", and "tropical weather" displays help analyze storm and precipitation potential,
respectively. Winds can be displayed on a full-screen, a fully interactive hodograph, or via an interactive
3-D trajectory hodogram. Each sounding is supported with a variety of data listings providing over 100
original and calculated parameters, which can be printed or saved to disk file. Severe weather potential
can be quickly identified using a user-defined parameter table that can be graphically displayed with the
sounding. Use the optional Soundingram to compare data profiles of various parameters, including
temperature, ozone, winds, and more. An optional Fronts & Forecast module can use thermal wind
advections and/or upwind soundings to create “forecast” soundings. An optional vertical cross-section
module can plot from 2 to 2000 soundings in either a time-based or distance-based orientation. The
cross-section has numerous data analysis options and can automatically interpolate a complete
composite sounding, including temperatures and winds. An optional mountain wave module interactively
accepts mountain parameters and produces single or double mountain (harmonic) lee wave analyses
along with detailed wave graphics and turbulence category data listings. RAOB also contains a unique
aerosol decoders module, and a one of kind Doppler decoder & display module which can simultaneously
produce PPI/VAD & RHI scan images with a vertical wind plot on the same screen.

1.2 Data Overview. RAOB can decode a wide variety of data types, including the common WMO
TM
coded data and unique data formats available from the WeatherBank, Weather Network, WSI ,
NCDC/FSL’s CD-ROM historical CARDS format soundings, NOAA/ARL’s forecast soundings, BUFKIT &
RUC/MAPS forecast data, UWYO, PAOS, SH4/NASA, Vaisala HiRes and Vaisala ETD data, IGRA,
ACARS aircraft data, KMA, RASS, SHARP modified data, BUFR & GRIB binary data, Hurricane
Dropsonde data, microwave and acoustic profiler data, Sodar & Lidar data, and CLASS/NCAR data which
can contain thousands of data levels per sounding, and many other data formats. For coded WMO
sounding data and other formats, RAOB can access files containing hundreds of soundings per file.
RAOB can also decode data in the raw format, where data elements are conveniently listed by
Pressure/Temperature and Height/Wind groups. Raw data, however, are not as readily available as
coded data, but can be obtained from the National Climatic Data Center (NCDC) at Asheville, NC, along
with other types of archived weather data. RAOB also uses the intrinsic CSV (spreadsheet style) data
format, enabling a wide variety of applications.

Coded (WMO) data that does not follow the standard formats specified by the Federal Meteorological
Handbook No. 4 (FMH-4) can either result in unusual data displays or cause RAOB to display a data
processing error message.
___________________________________________________________________________
See the section on DATA SOURCES for information regarding availability of sounding data.
2

1.3 Program Modules. RAOB is a modular program. This User Manual describes the capabilities
of all program modules regardless of those modules purchased. The Basic Module is the only stand-
alone module and is necessary for the operation of the other optional modules.

RAOB Basic Module:

Fully scalable Skew-T and Emagram sounding diagrams up to 100 mb.
Partially scalable Tephigram sounding diagram (only up to 100 mb).
Download sounding data directly from the Internet via HTTP and FTP methods.
Numerous thermodynamic and storm indices data are calculated and displayed.
Graphic and text displays of key sounding parameters, including LCL, LFC, and CCL.
Includes Station Locator file editor.
Mini-hodograph display in upper corner of plotted sounding diagram.
An interactive Soaring diagram that produces lift indices, including thermal & trigger temperatures.
Processes RAOB Raw & CSV data, WMO Coded data, SHARP, BUFKIT, and UWYO data formats.
Encodes any of the above data formats into RAOB’s Raw data format.
Includes the highly versatile Custom View display system.

RAOB Lite:
The RAOB Lite program is an introductory version of the RAOB Basic program. It is a scaled down
version that contains essential functionality for accurate and thorough analyses. The RAOB Lite program
contains the following key features:
- The WMO and BUFKIT data decoders.
- The Soaring diagram and displays.
- The classic parameter listing of key weather indices.
- Internet download capability plus standard input / output functions.
- Sounding diagram configuration options.
- Data scanner displays up to 10 parameters.

The following key features will become functional upon upgrade to the Basic program module:
- UWYO, SHARP, and RAOB"s CSV data decoders.
- DeCoded and Source data editors.
- Diagram dual temperature scaling option.
- Diagram sounding profile color options.
- Diagram variable wind shafts option.
- Diagram custom Height and Temperature line options.
- Diagram adiabat and mixing-ratio display options.
- Personalized logo overlay display option.
- Custom parameter data display listing options.
- Multi-system configuration options.
- Data scanner displays up to 30 parameters.
- Data sequencer to 3-D sounding profile viewing.

RAOB Optional Program Modules. The RAOB Basic program is a prerequisite for any of these optional
program modules. The RAOB Lite program can not access any of the following modules, until it is
upgraded to the Basic program configuration.

Aerosol Decoders Module:

This module contains decoders which can process non-conventional atmospheric parameters, such as
dust, particulate matter, and other parameters of interest. This decoder is unique in that it can process
atmospheric parameters without the need for associated Temperature or Wind data. The only
requirements are a Station Elevation and parameter Heights. RAOB can process up to 3 different
parameters for each profile. If the aerosol data in binary format, then the optional Binary Data Deoders
module is required. Additionally, time-height diagrams can be created with use of the Cross-Section
module, and soundingrams can be created with the Soundingram module.
3

Analytic Module:
Includes text/graphic displays of CAT, LLWS, Thermals, Icing, CAPE graphics, Clouds, Contrails,
Inversions, Wind speed & shear, RH, ThetaE, Refractivity/ducting analyses, and others.
Allows a versatile array of configurable program algorithms for turbulence, icing and other parameters.
Contains the Complete, Analyses & Severe Weather data listings.
Severe weather parameter table for storm potential analyses – configurable.
Severe Weather, Winter Weather, Fire/Air-Quality, and Tropical Weather specialty display screens.
Layer Analyzer screen allows detailed analyses of any sounding layer.
Cloud data editor with manual or automatic cloud generation options.
Comprehensive fog detection and type table. User configurable.
Audio/visual weather alert system. User configurable.
Detailed comparisons of any 2 soundings or multiple overlays of up to 5 soundings.

Binary (BUFR & GRIB & netCDF) Decoder Module:

BUFR: Plots and analyzes the special WMO code form FM 94 BUFR (Binary Universal Form for the
Representation) of meteorological data containing various forms of binary meteorological data including
sounding data. This decoder only processes the sounding data formats, including the unique formats
produced by the US NWS. BUFR data sets can contain single or multiple sounding files.

GRIB: Plots and analyzes the special WMO code form FM 92 GRIB (Gridded Binary) data containing
various forms of binary meteorological data including sounding data. RAOB can only decode the popular
GRIBv1 data formats. The newer GRIBv2 format contains too many unique (3rd party) compression
schemes, plus most data can be retrieved in the simpler GRIBv1 format

netCDF: netCDF (network Common Data Form) is another form of binary data that contains single
sounding and data arrays in grid format, similar to GRIB data. It was developed at the Unidata Program
Center in Boulder, Colorado. The netCDF decoder uses the same user display screen as the GRIB data.
RAOB uses the “ncdump” utility to retrieve sounding data for specific locations. This utility was also
developed by Unidata personnel. Currently, only the most common data fields are decoded. If a
customer finds netCDF data that does not correctly process, please notify ERS.

Cross-Section (Standard) Module:

Produces time-base and distance-based cross-section using 2 to 100 soundings.
Diagrams are scalable while cross-section data can easily be edited for sequence and labels.
Analyze/contour cross-sections using most analysis options available to sounding diagrams.
Each analysis option can be user-configured for data interval, color, line-type & thickness.
Automatically interpolate a complete sounding anywhere along the cross-section diagram.
Unique Composite Sounding Map screen allows sounding interpolation from any group of sounding data.

Cross-Section (Advanced) Module:

Contains all features available with the Standard Cross-Section module plus …
Produces cross-sections containing up to 6,000 soundings.
Analyses can also be produced in vivid colorized, or painted displays, including unique coloring schemes.
View data in a split-screen format, or display weather symbols below the sectional diagram.
Colorized analyses can be user-defined with the built in Gradient Editor.
Can also display 2 or 3 or 4 panels on the same screen – great for comparison purposes.
Ability to ZOOM into any portion of the diagram – and save as a new diagram.
Compare 2 different cross-section or time-section diagrams simultaneously.
Capable of batch-generation of time-height diagrams.

Doppler Decoder/Display Module:

The Doppler screen is unique because it plots 3 different lidar-based images on one display: PPI/VAD,
RHI, and DBS (or vertical wind plots). In addition to a complete set of interactive screen display options,
this display also includes a full menu of Batch & Timer options.
4

Encoders Modules:

Standard Encoders Module:

With this module RAOB can encode sounding data into any of these data formats:
- RAOB’s RAW (or decoded temperature & wind format)
- RAOB’s CSV (comma-separated, spreadsheet style)
- WMO Coded (Land fixed, Land mobile, and Ship)
- BUFKIT
- GSD (FSL)
- SHARP (SPC) Encoder

Binary Encoders Module:

With this module RAOB can encode sounding data into any of these data formats:
- BUFR (binary format)
- netCDF (binary format)

STANAG (NATO) Encoders (& Decoders) Module.

Export Module (Advanced):

Powerful, full-featured, menu-driven exporting system capable of exporting sounding elements for each
data level, calculated data parameters, and various layer data such as icing and turbulence. Data can be
exported as Text or in spreadsheet CSV and TSV formats. User can adjust data positioning and data
units. The Standard Export function is included with the optional Analytic module, but this Advanced
Export module offers many more options and features and is continually being expanded to meet new
customer needs.

Fronts & Forecast Module:

Automates long-established “single-station-analysis” techniques.
Automatically forecast maximum surface temperatures from early morning soundings.
Uses thermal wind data to analyze frontal information and associated weather patterns.
Produces forecast soundings using thermal wind advections or from upwind sounding data.

High Altitude Module:

Plot sounding data above 100 mb and up to the 0.001 mb level. All associated text and parameter data
are also presented for high altitude levels. High level processing is also applied to other program displays
and modules, such as the hodographs, cross-sections, and soundingrams.

Hodograph & Interactive Module:

Click & drag sounding profile (temperature & dewpoint) graphical modifications.
Click & keystroke wind plot (speed & direction) graphical modifications.
Multiple parcel lifting options including options to adjust the entire sounding.
Automatic dry adiabatic lapse rate (DALR) surface layer modifications.
Zoom (in & out) on any portion of the sounding diagram’s temperature profile.
Full-screen, fully interactive click & drag hodograph with corresponding wind data.
Full-screen, 3-D hodogram (trajectory diagram) with interactive tilt & rotation options.

Merge module (Standard):

Merges from 2 to 6,000 soundings into a single composite sounding.
Or, automatically merges the “last” sounding of multi-sounding time-series datafiles.
This module also includes features of the Batch & Timer functions.

Merge module/utility (Advanced):

Automatically merges temperature/dewpoint and wind (UVW) data for the entire multi-sounding file.
Creates both individually merged sounding files and a composite multi-sounding file.
Contains a variety of data management options, timer functions, and FTP capabilities.
Module can run independently of the RAOB Program, while feeding RAOB’s real-time processors.
5

Radiometer Decoder modules.

Radiometer sounding data is produced by surface-based microwave profilers. Soundings typically include
liquid-water and vapor-density data in addition to standard temperature and moisture data. Wind data is
not produced. Soundings can extend to a height of 10 km and can be produced every few seconds.
RAOB can processes both SCAN and ZENITH data types. This data type can also be processed with
RAOB’s Real-Time Display (an optional program) module, which automatically updates time-height
diagrams. The Advanced Radiometer Decoder Module can also process 6 additional scalar parameters:
Rain (yes/no), Quality Flag, Integrated Vapor & Liquid, and Cloud Base Temperature & Heights.

Real-Time Cross-Section Data Processor Module:

This module requires use of the optional Advanced Cross-Section module.
Automatically detects and decodes new sounding data (programmable to 1-second intervals).
The current cross-section diagram is automatically re-plotted.
The cross-section data analyses are automatically updated.

Sodar/Lidar/Radar (with Acoustic/Radio) Decoder module:

Plot data from the Sonic Detection And Ranging (Sodar), Light Detection and Ranging (Lidar), and Radio
Acoustic Sounding System (RASS) sounding data. These methodologies take advantage of three
technologies (laser, acoustic, and electromagnetic) to provide real time temperature and/or wind profiles.

Soundingram (Standard) Module:

Performs detailed profile analyses and comparisons of key sounding data, including
- potential temperature, shear, ozone, density, refractivity, and more...
Diagrams are fully configurable similar to the standard sounding diagram.
Plot sounding data profiles on one or two separate diagrams.
Compare up to four soundings on one or two diagrams.

Soundingram (Advanced) Module:

Performs all functions contained in the Standard Soundingram module, plus...
Displays 3 Soundingram panels at the same time, if a wide-screen monitor is used.
Displays an optional "difference profile" when comparing 2 soundings.
Provides Batch & Timer and Batch-Load functions for greater automation.

Special Data Decoders Module:

Plot and analyze over 90 popular sounding data formats. These decoders are constantly kept up-to-date
as data codes and formats change. Program updates are routinely compiled and made available for
download to RAOB customers. New decoders are added upon request of customers. New decoders can
be added in as little as 24-hours, especially for those formats that are in ASCII or human-readable text.
See the section on RAOB DATA for details on all data formats decoded.

Turbulence & Mountain-Wave Module:

Analyzes mountain (lee) wave turbulence with respect to single or double mountains.
Provides wave characteristics, including wavelength, amplitude and vertical velocity.
Automatically append mountain parameters to individual sounding files.
Use a mountain parameter data file to catalogue mountain ranges.
Configurable exponential wave decay function.
6

2. SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS.

2.1 Computers. RAOB requires a computer with a hard drive, keyboard, mouse, and a color super-
VGA monitor. RAOB program files require approximately 100 MB of disk space. Computers with less
than a 1000MHz processor will experience sluggish performance. A CD-ROM drive is required to load
and install the RAOB program. NOTE: RAOB is best displayed using a screen resolution of 1024x768, or
better. New code has been added to take better advantage of new widescreen computer monitors. Note
that RAOB will may not function with some dual-monitor systems.

2.2 Printers. RAOB will print to any device supported by the Window’s environment.

2.3 Software. RAOB will function within any Windows environment, but not with virtual systems.

2.4 Program Files. When RAOB is activated, the program first searches for all necessary program
files. If a required file cannot be located, the program displays a warning message. If this occurs, the
user must re-install the RAOB program or locate and replace the missing file by some other means.

3. GETTING STARTED.

3.1 Program Installation. RAOB is installed onto the computer’s harddrive by executing the
SETUP.EXE program located on the distribution CD-ROM, or by using the downloadable installation file.
During installation, program and data directories will automatically be created. The program’s
configuration files will be created upon the initial activation of RAOB. Below are the recommended
(default) sub-directories that the installation program will generate.

C:\Program Files\RAOB Program for program files.

C:\Program Files\RAOB Program\RAOBDATA for rawinsonde (sounding) data files.
C:\Program Files\RAOB Program\CROSDATA for cross-section dataset files.
C:\Documents and Settings\user\My Documents\My Pictures for images
C:\Documents and Settings\user\Application Data for working files & settings

3.2 Plot a Sounding. The RAOB program starts with a blank sounding diagram. Load a sounding by
selecting FILE from the Menu Bar and then select OPEN to access a data file. Once plotted, the sounding
can be analyzed using the ANALYSE menu item. The diagram can be adjusted by using the OPTIONS
then DIAGRAM menu items. To access the vertical cross-sections screen, use the DISPLAYS menu
option. Use of the HELP files will assist with familiarization with the program’s many other capabilities and
features.

3.3 Station Data*. The RAOB.STN data file contains station data from around the world. All station
data are listed with respect to WMO numbers, which RAOB searches for during the decoding process.
Automatic retrieval of station elevation and coordinates only occur when WMO coded data is accessed. If
a favorite sounding station is not included in the RAOB.STN file, it can easily be added. Additions,
deletions or modifications can be made to the RAOB.STN file with any text editor or by using RAOB’s
built-in editor.

* CAUTION: File structure and data format must be exactly followed or program errors will occur. If file
editing is performed, be sure to keep all WMO numbers in numerical sequence and ensure commas are
used between each data item. Do not remove the title and associated text information preceding the
tabular data.
7

4. SOUNDING DIAGRAM (Menu Bar).

4.1 File. (Open sounding data and Filter station data options.)

New Sounding. Creates a new, blank diagram. Data can be manually entered to create a special or
custom sounding. Create a new sounding by using the data editors found under the EDIT option located
on the Menu Bar. With the optional Interactive Module, data can be graphically added to the diagram
using the mouse – see the Interactive Module section for details.

Open Sounding. Opens the computer’s data directory, enabling selection of a previously saved data file.
See opened List box below...

When a datafile containing

multiple soundings is
accessed, the Sounding List
Box (at left) is displayed.

When a file of WMO Coded

soundings is displayed, the
column headers (WMO,
ICAO, etc) can be sorted by
clicking on the headers. Also,
the FILTER button at the
lower-right can be used to
help select or restrict the
display of specified groups of
data. See example below…

When the FILTER button (see above) is

used, two filter Mode options become
available.

1. WMO Regions. This is a quick and

easy way to selectively display only the
desired global sounding regions. The
“Help” button provides a list of WMO
numbers contained in each WMO
Region.

2. WMO Blocks. This option provides

very selective capabilities to “Include” or
“Exclude” specific WMO Block
numbers.
8

File Menu Continued…

Save Sounding As … This option will save the currently plotted sounding with a user defined filename.
The data format will not be changed. However, if the plotted sounding is from a datafile containing
multiple soundings, then only the currently displayed sounding will be saved. (In order to save the entire
datafile with a different name, you must first access the file using the EDIT menu’s “Edit Entire File”
option, and then save the file with a different name.)

Standard Data Encoders Module. This is an optional program module.

The “Encode Sounding As …” option allows a variety of data saving formats. The first option (see
below) is the RAW format, which is indigenous to the RAOB program. This format is visible when using
the RAW data editor (press F3) which is listed as the “Edit DeCoded Data” option under the EDIT menu.
The RAW data format structure is described in greater detail in the “RAW DATA FORMAT” section of this
manual. Other encoders (CSV, WMO, BUFKIT, GSD/FSL, SHARP) are only available with the optional
Standard Encoders module. The BUFR & netCDF encoders are only available with the optional Binary
Data Encoder module. The STANAG encoder is included with the STANAG Encoders/Decoders module.

The Google
Earth option
is available to
all RAOB
programs. It
creates a
KML file
which can be
shared with
others with
Google Earth
installed on
their PCs.

CSV Encoder. This option saves the sounding in RAOB’s CSV format, this is a spread-sheet style
(comma-separated) format. This is a very versatile format which allows a variety of data options, including
single or multiple-sounding files.

The CSV format is described in

greater detail in the “CSV DATA
FORMAT” section located near
the end of this manual. In
addition to the standard
pressure, temperature, and
wind data. This format also
allows Ozone, Omega,
Radiometric, vertical wind (W)
data, cloud cover (CFRL) data,
and many other types of data
elements.
9

Data Encoders continued…

WMO Encoder.

The WMO encoder saves the sounding in

the common WMO coded format as defined
by FMH-4 on Radiosonde Codes. Saved
data groups include TTAA, TTBB, and
PPBB from the surface to 100 mb and
include TTCC, TTDD, PPCC and PPDD for
data above 100 mb. Note that the optional
High Altitude module is required for data
above 100 mb (which is also true for the
CSV data encoder described above).
Unlike the CSV Encoder, the WMO
Encoder can not encode multiple sounding
files.

The WMO encoder can save data in the

Land (fixed station), Mobile (mobile station),
or Ship (ocean mobile station) mode
formats.

The Land mode needs a valid WMO

number as a reference to ensure accurate
correlation to station elevation and
coordinates. If RAOB does not detect a
valid WMO number, one must be entered
into RAOB’s Locator File (file: RAOB.STN)
via the Edit button.

The WMO encoder also requires entry of

the Day/Hour information and whether wind
speeds will be coded as knots or meters-
per-second. This data is needed for all 3
modes.

The Mobile mode does not need a WMO

number, but instead requires a mobile site
ID designator – similar to the station ICAO.
Also required are the site’s coordinates and
elevation.

The Ship mode also needs a site ID, which

can be 4-5 characters in length.
Coordinates are also needed, but elevation
is not required since all ship sounding data
are assumed to be based at sea level.

th
The next page discusses the 4 mode of the WMO Encoder < Batch >, which permits automated
encoding using the File menu’s Batch & Timer Processing option.
10

WMO Encoder continued...

The WMO encoder can be invoked

for batch processing by two methods;
each is discussed later in this
chapter. They are the System/DOS
batch command process options and
RAOB’s Batch & Timer Processing
options, which are found in the File
menu options.

For either method of invoking; the

Encode Mode, File Name, and File
Path must be pre-specified on the
panel shown at left.

The File Name construct allows an

ICAO and date & time tokens for
Day, Hour, and Minutes. When
included in the File Name, RAOB will
automatically replace the tokens with
the 2-digit values found from the
computer’s internal date & time
settings. If needed, the user can
manually enter the Year or any other
unique data.

BUFKIT Encoder. This option saves the sounding in the popular BUFKIT (nam style) format. When
encoding multiple soundings, they should be a time-series collection since DTG information is attached to
each sounding. The user must identify the ICAO (Station ID), the start time and time intervals as shown
below. Omega and CFRL (cloud cover) data will also be included if available. In addition to the
sounding’s standard data (pres, temp, wind), BUFKIT data also contains supplemental data parameters
(such as Helicity, Storm-Motion, and CAPE). Note that RAOB will calculate its own supplemental data
values, even if provided by source sounding data, such as from the source BUFR data files.
11

Data Encoders continued…

GSD (FSL) Encoder. This encodes data in the NOAA Global Systems Division (GSD) format, formerly
known as Forecast Systems Laboratory (FSL).

When encoding multiple soundings, they should be a time-series collection, since DTG information is
attached to each sounding. RAOB will automatically fill in "Header Options" data if available. Otherwise,
the user must identify "Date/Time" information, "Data Type", and "Station ID" (or ICAO). The WMO
number is optional, but should be entered if known. RAOB links the WMO number with the RAOB.STN
station reference tables.

SHARP (SPC) Encoder. This encodes data in the SHARP SPC (Storm Prediction Center) format.
12

Data Encoders continued…

Binary Encoders Module. This is an optional program module, which includes the BUFR and netCDF
data encoders.

BUFR Encoder. This option saves the sounding in the special WMO code form FM 94 BUFR (Binary
Universal Form for the Representation) data format. Both single and multiple sounding files can be
encoded into the BUFR format.

The first tab of the BUFR encoder is shown below. It encodes administrative qualifiers necessary for the
proper function of BUFR decoders. The topmost entry, “WMO Index” is a restricted entry field, as it only
allows predetermined table options (reference: Common Code Table C-1). If you do not represent any of
the allowed table entries, then you must contact the WMO to add your organization to the table listing. In
contrast, the “Station acquisition” and “Observer ID” entries are optional and completely free form. The
“Sounding Type” entries should be selected to best identify your sounding data.

The second tab of the BUFR encoder allows encoding of either a single sounding, all soundings within a
multi-sounding file, or a specified range of soundings. Note that the BUFR Encoder only encodes the
following parameters: Pressure, Temperature, Dewpoint, Height, and Winds (U,V,W components).
13

Data Encoders continued…

netCDF Encoder. This option saves the sounding in the netCDF (network Common Data Form). It was
developed at the Unidata Program Center in Boulder, Colorado. RAOB uses the “ncgen” utility to encode
the sounding data into a binary format. This utility was developed by UCAR, where the netCDF copyright
notice and disclaimer can be found in the section call Binary Decoders.

Please note that while RAOB can encode sounding data as explained below, RAOB does not decode the
encoded netCDF data files. However, RAOB can decode commonly used netCDF formatted data as
explained in the Binary Decoders module section.

Below is the netCDF Encoders options panel. There are currently 2 options: Conventional and
Radiometer profiles. The Conventional option only encodes one sounding at a time (one per file), and
includes temperature and wind data. The Radiometer option can encode single soundings, or multiple,
time-series, soundings per data file.
14

Data Encoders continued…

STANAG (NATO) Encoders Module. This is an optional program module, which includes also includes
STANAG decoders.

A STANAG is a NATO Standardization Agreement.

RAOB's STANAG Encoders module is based on information contained in NATO STANAG weather
message standards. This encoder offers output options for eight NATO messages:

Duration of validity. Values range from 0 to 12 hours. The zero value is typically used by US forces.

Add 99999 at end of STANAG message. Only some end users require this option.

Consolidate messages. If more than one STANAG message is selected, all messages will be appended
to one text document.

Note 1. GTRAJ = General Trajectory Program created by the US Army Ballistic Research Laboratory,
Aberdeen Proving Grounds. MD.

Note 2. METTA encoding uses RAOB derived cloud/fog/refractivity calculations for message creation.
15

File Menu Continued…

Download Data… Use this option to easily

retrieve favorite sounding data directly from
Internet sites. After clicking on the
“Download Data…” option, the Download
Rawinsonde Data via Internet display
screen appears (as shown below). Use this
screen to configure you favorite data sites.

Just click the Download button to

retrieve data. The data can be
automatically saved to a specified
directory and can be quickly opened
for analyses.

Some Internet sites require specific

identification of Date & Time
information before data access can
occur. Since many sounding datafile
names use Date & Time information
in the filename, “time tokens” are
used for file identification purposes.
If time tokens are required, then the
Required Time Tokens data box will
become enabled, whereupon the
user must then supply the required
"date/time" information before data
retrieval can begin.

Use the above Add Site or Edit Site buttons to add/edit Internet site URLs. When accessed, the Internet
Download Editor is displayed as shown below, where Internet sites can be added & edited.

Use the Time Tokens to specify particular data files associated with each URL address. The above
UCAR/NCAR address does not require time tokens. The URL address shown below does require tokens,
which when used, requires the user to specify time values in the Required Time Tokens box (above).

Token Example: http://meteora.ucsd.edu/weather/observations/upperair/@Y@M@D@H_upa.wmo

Note: Use @YYY (versus @Y) for 4-digit year groups.
16

File Menu Continued…

Batch & Timer Processing… These features are available

with either the optional Analytic or Standard Merge modules.
By selecting this option, the program’s Batch & Timer-based
options become available as shown below.

RAOB allows both Timer-based and Command-line

processing options. The Command-Line (batch or script)
options are explained later in this section, including examples.

When the above Batch and Timer Processing option is selected, the following screen is displayed as
shown below.

File Location. The user can select source data from either the local PC’s Drive\Path (with wildcard
options for most recent or all files found), the Drive\Path\Filename (selects a specific file), or from an
Internet URL. When the Internet URL option is selected, the user can choose where data is to be saved.

Start Mode. The Immediate start option is very useful for testing a batch setup.

Download Times. Select the beginning download time and follow-on download intervals. If the download
must start at a future time, then uncheck the “Use the current time” box and complete the “Local” text box
with the desired start time. If the “Download every” interval data is entered, then the user must check the
Continuous downloads box option to enable automatic follow-on downloads. The Sound box option
should be used if user wants to hear an audible beep following each download.
17

File Menu Continued…

The Processing Options tab (shown below) determines how the downloaded data is processed.

If data consists of multiple soundings … The user can select these options: Process ALL, FIRST, or
LAST sounding in the datafile. If the datafile contains WMO formatted data, then a specific WMO station
number can be entered for processing.

Time-Series Data Options. This is a special data processing procedure for a unique customer
requirement. Details are listed in the panel’s “Information” button.

Data options. Sounding data can be printed in the “Source Data” or “DeCoded Data” format. Both
formats can be viewed and edited using their respective data editors, which are available for use from
RAOB’s Edit menu.

Diagram options. Select one of the diagram options, which will either be displayed, printed, or saved to
file (as selected from the recessed options box located just below the diagram options). Note that the
“Custom View” option can not be printed to paper, but its image can be saved to file. If the Save as option
is selected, the user then must set three more configuration options … the File Type, the File Path, and
the Filename (with either automatic or manual filename entry). The Numerically increment filename
option automatically adds numbered sequences onto the user specified filenames.

FTP. Use the “FTP saved image” option to automatically send saved images to other locations. Use the
“FTP Settings” button to configure FTP Host, Username, and Logon Password.
18

File Menu Continued…

The Export & Encode Options tab (shown below) additional data processing options.

Export data. Check the Produce a data export file to export data to file in accordance with configuration
settings established in the Export Sounding Data File Menu option (as discussed on the next few pages).
Check the Same option for no filename changes; or check the Numerically increment option to
sequentially number filenames if the Continuous downloads are selected (see the previous Timer
Options tab); or check the Append Date to add only the Date to the filename; or check the Append DTG
to add both Date & Time to the filename. Use the Data export configuration settings button to display
the current export settings and change options.

Encode data. Data can be encoded in the WMO format or RAOB's CSV format, which require the
optional "Standard Encoders" module. Use the “encoder configuration” buttons to display the current
export settings and change options as needed. WMO encoded soundings are only saved as single files.
For CSV encoded soundings, when processing files containing multiple soundings, you can select either
Single sounding output files or a Consolidated output file containing all processed soundings.

Email Alerts. RAOB can send email alerts for severe weather parameters that meet or exceed user-
defined thresholds. Use the Weather Alert Editor to configure alerts, as seen later in this Manual.

At left is the Email Configuration

panel. A successful “Send test
email” must be performed before
emails can be sent.

The SMTP Server is “your” email

server host system. For Gmail
accounts, you always use
"smtp.gmail.com"

More information is available via

RAOB's Help files.
19

File Menu Continued…

The Merge 2 Soundings tab (shown below). Functions on this tab are only available with the optional
Standard Merge Module.

Source Data Path #1. Merges sounding temperature and humidity (dewpoint) data -- not wind data.
Supplemental data will also be merged, such as ozone, radiometric data (vapor density and liquid water),
and omega data – if they exist. This sounding's Station Elevation and Coordinates will also be used for
resulting composite sounding.

Source Data Path #2. Merges sounding wind data only -- including vertical wind (W) component values.

Encoding format. Select either CSV or WMO encoding.

- CSV Format. This format maintains the original temperature and wind data intervals. This format will
also retain supplemental data, such as ozone, radiometric data (vapor density and liquid water), and
omega data. The resulting sounding will be formatted in accordance with the RAOB CSV format.

- WMO Format. This format will only transform temperature and wind data into the WMO standard and
significant data levels (such as TTAA, TTBB, etc.). Any supplemental data will be ignored as it is not
possible to encode this data into the WMO format.

Advanced Merge Module. Permits quick access to the optional Merge Module utility, which runs
independently of the RAOB Program and can automatically process all soundings within multi-sounding
data files. This module is discussed later in this manual.
20

File Menu Continued… (Batch Processing, Command-line options)

Batch Processing. The RAOB program can be executed from the Windows RUN command or from MS-
DOS. When called from a batch command, the RAOB program is activated, then performs requested
tasks, and then closes. The batch format is as follows ...

RAOB (Config#,)Data(WMO#),Option1,Option2, etc...

An example follows ...

C:\Programs\RAOB Program\RAOB Config1,C:\Data\DAT.UPR(72250),Sounding/P,Export

- Note: that the “Config#” setting is an optional parameter.

The above example uses RAOB’s configuration setting #1, and processes the "Example.txt" sounding
datafile, then prints the standard sounding diagram, and then exports the sounding data using default
options as configured within the RAOB program.

Explanation of example batch ...

RAOB is the location of the RAOB executable file ... C:\Program Files\RAOB Program\RAOB
Data is the location of the sounding datafile to be processed ... C:\Raobdata\Example.txt
(WMO#) is used to process a specified WMO station. It is used only for multi-sounding files containing
WMO coded data. It will override any WMO settings used in the program’s menu options.

Options ...
Sounding/P = print the standard sounding diagram
Hodograph/P = print the standard hodograph diagram
Severe/F = save the "severe weather" sounding diagram to file
Winter/P = print the "winter weather" sounding diagram
Fire/F = save the “fire-weather & air-quality” diagram to file
Tropical/P = print the "tropical weather" display diagram
Custom/F = save the “custom view” diagram to file
Source = print the sounding's "source" data
Decoded = print the sounding's "decoded" data
Export = create an export datafile using default options contained within RAOB

Batch Timer Option. There is a special batch command option, which lets you automatically activate the
“Batch and Timer Processing Options” using the settings last saved by the user. An example batch
command follows . . .

C:\Program Files\RAOB Program\RAOB Start-Timer

21

File Menu Continued… (Batch Processing, Command-line options : Continued)

Special Batch Option. This special batch function only downloads data. It is only activated from a DOS
or script command, where RAOB opens, downloads data, and then closes. This is commonly used to
download BUFKIT forecast soundings from the Internet, where the complete BUFKIT datafile is displayed
on the webpage.

The RAOB command line is: FTP,Path\Filelist

Where Path\Filelist is the computer Path (or folder location) of the Filelist. The Filelist contains the FTP
URLs identifying the data to download. The Filelist can contain up to 5,000 URLs, which must be created
in a text-only format.

Below is an example of the contents of a Filelist containing 3 URLs for BUFKIT data. The first line must
be "startftp" and the last line must be "endftp". For each FTP download, the data line begins with the URL,
then the FTP Username (UN), the FTP Password (PW), "Text", and the Path location where the
downloaded data is to be saved on your PC system. Each item in the data line must be separated with
the pipe character (|).

startftp
ftp://ftp.meteo.psu.edu/pub/bufkit/namm_kavp.buf|UN|PW|Text|c:\ftpdata
ftp://ftp.meteo.psu.edu/pub/bufkit/namm_keyw.buf|UN|PW|Text|c:\ftpdata
ftp://ftp.meteo.psu.edu/pub/bufkit/namm_kgcn.buf|UN|PW|Text|c:\ftpdata
endftp

If the FTP login Username (UN) and Password (PW) are not required, then leave them blank, which would
then look like the below example.

startftp
ftp://ftp.meteo.psu.edu/pub/bufkit/namm_kavp.buf|||Text|c:\ftpdata
ftp://ftp.meteo.psu.edu/pub/bufkit/namm_keyw.buf|||Text|c:\ftpdata
ftp://ftp.meteo.psu.edu/pub/bufkit/namm_kgcn.buf|||Text|c:\ftpdata
endftp

Note: you should first test the URL used (including applicable UN and PW values) before including them in
the Filelist. This test should be done using Sounding's "Download Data" option found via the File Menu.

Properties, Auto-Load, and Printing …

Properties. Displays basic information regarding file

size & location and basic sounding data.

AutoLoad This Sounding. If selected, the currently

displayed sounding is automatically loaded & plotted
upon the next activation of the RAOB program.

Print Sounding Data. Print either the Source

(coded) or DeCoded (raw) data. Both of these data
types can be viewed using the “Edit” menu option
located on the main menu bar.
22

File Menu Continued… Export Sounding Data - "Classic Export Mode"

This is only available with the optional Analytic Module.

This option allows creation of a coma-separated text
data file of key sounding parameters which can be used
for other data automation needs. Processing options
allow for selection of either the “Plotted sounding only”,
or “All soundings”, or a “Selected range of soundings”
from multiple sounding data files.

There are 2 file output options – the old DOS format (for
continued use for prior program users) or the new and
user-configurable Default format.

The "Advanced Export Mode" is explained next…

Old DOS Format. Below is an example “dump” output, where the first 10 lines include header information
that describes the 16 output parameters per data level. The first 5 data levels are included in this
example. Each dump file is created using units defined by the user, such as feet versus meters and AGL
versus MSL . . .
"WIND","96996 - YPCC - COCOS ISL INTL ARPT, AU"," ","03-19-2002"
"ELEVATION (FT) = ",10
"LAT/LONG: 12°11'00"" S 96°49'00"" E"
"DATA LEVELS = ",41
"NOTE 1: Most data levels have HT(height) and PR(pressure) values."
"NOTE 2: Missing dewpoint data is represented by the 999.9 value."
"NOTE 3: No data is represented by the -999 value."
"DATA: PR(mb), HT(m,AGL), T(C), Td(C), DD(deg), FF(m/s), PT(K), ePT(K),"
" RH(%), MixR(g/Kg), Water(cm), Den(Kg/m3), VirT(C), WetBulb(C),"
" Shr/kFT(kts/1000ft), Ri"
1014,0,25.2,20.2,125,4.1,297.2,342,74,14.87,1.189,1.174,27.9,21.7,-999,0
929,763,18.6,16.1,-999,-999,298,336.2,85,12.5,.124,1.101,20.8,16.9,-999,0
918,865,18.8,11.8,-999,-999,299.2,328,64,9.52,.506,1.089,20.5,14.4,-999,0
868,1344,15.2,12.1,-999,-999,300.3,332,82,10.28,.078,1.042,17,13.2,-999,0
856,1463,17.6,-7.4,-999,-999,304,311.1,16,2.38,.011,1.024,18,5.9,-999,0

Default Format. This new format not only provides a level-by-level listing of sounding data, but it also
provides a listing of all key sounding indices and related analyzed parameters, such as CAPE, SWEAT,
significant levels, inversion levels, thickness levels, and more. See a partial example output below:
"RAOB 5.6 07-22-2004"
""
"Data Format Information/Header ..."
"NOTE: No data is represented by the -999 value."
"DATA: PR(mb),HT(m,MSL),T(C),Td(C),DD(deg),FF(kts),PT(K),ePT(K),RH(%)"
""
"FILENAME = CAPE.RAW"
"DATA TYPE = RAW Format"
"NUMBER OF SOUNDINGS LISTED = ",1
""
"SOUNDING = ","AMA - AMARILLO, TX"
"ELEVATION (M) = ",1099
"LAT/LONG = ",35.22,"N",101.83,"W"
"DATA LEVELS = ",48
882,1099,29.6,16.6,170,17,313.8,356.3,46
- - - - -
100,16616,-68.9,-999,-999,-999,394.3,0,0
"*** Significant Data ***"
"FRZG Lvl = ",4492," m MSL ",591," mb"
"cclEL = ",13800," m MSL ",156," mb ",-63.7,"C"
"lfcEL = ",13655," m MSL ",159," mb ",-62.7,"C"
"LFC = ",3206," m MSL ",691," mb ",11.7,"C"
"CCL = ",3165," m MSL ",694," mb ",12,"C"
"LCL = ",2746," m MSL ",730," mb ",13.6,"C"
"Water = ",3.11," cm "
"Hail = ",.64," cm"
23

Export Sounding Data (continued) ...

Processing Options allow selection of files

containing single or multiple soundings.

Click the “Data Options” button to display the

“Data Export Options” configuration box and two
Tabs of processing options (shown below)…

Tab 1. Data Units. This tab allows the user to

select from four configuration unit options to be
applied to the output export file.

Tab 2. Data Format and Content. This tab

allows control over which data sets are included
in the export file, including file type (either an
ASCII text file or a CSV spreadsheet file).

Data Format and Content. The “CSV Spreadsheet File” option (as shown above) allows
output for CAT, Icing, and Lightning data. The user must specify the layer of interest (via
the Top & Base options) and vertical resolution (via the Interval option) – whereupon the
program will display the number of columns needed to display requested data (which is 18
columns for the above example). Since the CAT, Icing, and Lightning data have no
associated standard numeric values, RAOB produces output as integers ranging from 0 – 7
(where 0 = a null value and 7 = a max value). Clicking the “Data” button will remind users of
this numeric display range. The Advanced Export Module has many more export options.
24

Export Sounding Data (continued) ... Advanced Export Mode (optional module).

Export Options. The Advanced Export Mode is a full-featured, menu-driven export system that gives the
st
user complete control of what and how data are exported. The 1 tab (Export Options) identifies which
soundings are to be exported. Data can be exported as plain text or in spreadsheet format, with additional
options for CSV or TSV formats.

Individual Parameters. This tab allows exporting of over 200 parameters that are either taken directly
from the sounding data or calculated by RAOB. The left column lists available export parameters where
the right column lists those selected for export. The SEARCH button helps locate desired export items.
The UP and DOWN buttons allow specific positioning of export items. The far right side of the tab permits
individual specification of export data labels, units, data mode, and decimal precision. A summary of
selected export parameters, elements, and layers are listed at the bottom of the configuration panel.
25

Export Sounding Data (continued) ... Advanced Export Mode (optional module).

Sounding Elements. This tab allows exporting of all "traditional" sounding data contained in the source
datafile, such as temperature, pressure, winds, etc (including Ozone). Supplemental profiles (like Virtual
temperature) can also be exported. This tab allows the user to re-create the sounding data. The user
nd
interface for Sounding Elements is identical to the prior Individual Parameters found on the 2 tab.

Layer Data. This tab is unique in that it allows exporting of data that are best organized by layers, such as
icing and turbulence. Layer regions and data intervals can be individually specified, thereby allowing the
user to identify the degree of vertical resolution required.

st
See the next page for explanation of 1 Column data values.
26

Export Sounding Data (continued) ... Advanced Export Mode (optional module).

Layer Data & Export Values. Exported Layer Data consists of numeric values that represent data
categories of each Export Layer. The text related data categories (such as Light or Severe) are converted
to numeric values (0-7), where 0 represents the minimum (or null) value and 7 represents the maximum
value. The following table shows how text categories are converted to numeric values:

Export Values
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Layer Data
Icing
Null TRC - LGT - MDT - SVR
(carburetor)

Icing
Null TRC - LGT - MDT - SVR
(structural)

Lightning
No - - - - - - Yes
Potential

Turbulence
Null LGT L-M MDT M-S SVR S-X XTR
(CAT)

Turbulence
Null LGT - L-M - M-S - SVR
(Wave)

Descriptions for Icing and Turbulence categories:

TRC = trace
LGT = Light
MDT = Moderate
SVR = Severe
XTR = Extreme
L-M = Light to Moderate
M-S = Moderate to Severe
S-X = Severe to Extreme

Note 1. A dash indicates that a specific numeric value is not exported since there are no data categories
for that value. For example, Lightning potential is only determined to be Yes or No, which is represented
by a 7 for Yes and a 0 for No. Only the Turbulence (CAT) export contains data categories for all 7
numeric values.

Note 2. The above export table of numeric values also applies to how layer data are exported in the
Classic Export mode, however, only Structural Icing, Lightning Potential, and CAT Turbulence is exported
in the Classic Export mode.
27

Export Sounding Data (continued) ... Advanced Export Mode (optional module).

• Mean Layers & Levels. This tab permits the export of 8 user-specified "Data Types", including Wind,
Temperatures, and others. Up to 24 separate layers/levels can be exported, where the user can specify
layer depth in feet or meters (in either AGL or MSL), or the user can specify the layer with respect to
pressure values (mb or hPa). Units options are also available for wind, temperature, and precipitable
water data items.
28

4.2 Edit.

Edit DeCoded Data. Use RAOB’s unique raw* data editor to easily add/modify data in the convenient
Pressure/Temperature and Height/Wind data groups. Other sounding information, such as station
elevation and location coordinates can also be identified. All data saved from this editor are only saved in
RAOB’s indigenous “raw” format* and all data is thoroughly checked for error limits and consistency.

Edit Source Data. Use Microsoft’s WordPad (text) editor to add/modify the sounding data. Caution: the
RAOB program does not quality control the changes made to data files via this editor – use the DeCoded
Data editor (above) for data quality control checking.

Edit Entire Source File. This also uses Microsoft’s WordPad (text) editor to add/modify data. This editor
displays all data contained in the datafile being accessed – including multiple soundings. Like the Source
Data editor above, no quality control checking is performed.

Edit Supplemental Data.

This form permits changes to the

sounding’s coordinates, elevation,
and descriptive information. This
display is also presented following
the Merge sounding process
(discussed later).

NOTE: If the sounding data is not

already in RAOB’s indigenous RAW*
format, any changes to the values on
this Supplemental Data form
automatically change the sounding’s
format to the RAW format, which can
be saved to file and then recalled for
later processing. This data can also
be "encoded" into other formats
using RAOB's encoder modules.

* See the RAW DATA FORMAT section of this manual for details about the structure of the raw data format.
29

Filter Sounding Data. This option converts a sounding into its conventional data levels: standard,
significant, and mandatory levels as per FMH-3 in accordance with WMO-coded procedures. The filter
process is especially useful for high-density soundings, such as those with more than 200 data levels per
sounding.

Edit Station Locator File. Use this option to edit the RAOB.STN sounding locator file. Note: it is important
to remember to keep all entries in numerical WMO sequence. Additionally, it is very important to use
comas between each data item. The locator file can also be modified using any text editor.

Edit Mountain Parameter File. This item is only available with the optional Mountain-Wave Module. Use
this option to edit the RAOB.MTN parameter file. This file associates specific mountains with individual
sounding sites (via WMO numbers). This enables automatic mountain parameter retrieval during
sounding processing. See the Mountain Waves chapter for more information regarding mountain
parameters.

Add/Delete Temperature Data… & Add/Delete Wind Data… These two options only provide information
about how to graphically add and remove data points on the sounding’s plotted profile. These menu
options are only available when the optional Interactive/Hodograph Module has been registered.

Data Saving. When sounding data is saved using the FILE & SAVE SOUNDING AS menu options or
when using the Source data editors, the data is automatically saved in its original format, such as Raw,
Coded, etc. When sounding data is saved using the DeCoded (or raw) data editor, data is always saved
in the RAW format -- even if the data was originally accessed in another format such as the WMO Coded
format. In order to save data in other formats, use the File Menu’s ENCODE SOUNDING AS menu
option. NOTE: Raw data files can be used with earlier DOS versions of RAOB, but they must be limited to
no more than 48 Pressure data levels and no more than 48 Wind data levels.
30

4.3 Displays. RAOB provides a variety of display formats to view sounding data.

Sounding Display. This is RAOB’s default sounding display. This example shows the common Skew-T
diagram. RAOB can also produce Emagram and Tephigram diagrams along with many configurable
diagram parameter and scaling options. See the section called Diagram Configuration for a complete list
of all diagram options. With the optional Hodo/Interactive Module, all graphic and text displays are
automatically updated as the sounding (profile and/or winds) are interactively modified, added, or deleted.
31

Sounding Scanner Display.

When a multiple sounding datafile is loaded into RAOB, three

icons appear at the upper-left corner of the computer screen.
First, there is the Sounding Controller, which permits sequencing
and looping of the sounding profiles. Left & right arrows permit
forward and backward sequencing and looping. Second, there
is the Sounding Scanner activation icon represented by a small
rectangular box surrounding small green & red mini-profiles.
Third, there is the Sounding Sequencer activation icon, which is
discussed on the next page.

When the Sounding Scanner activation icon is activated with a click of the mouse, the Sounding Scanner
screen appears as seen below. The Sounding Scanner activation icon is replaced by a small Sounding
Profile icon, which can be used to return to the main Sounding screen.

The Sounding Scanner screen first initializes itself by running all the datafile’s soundings through RAOB’s
data processor to calculate dozens of significant weather parameters for later display. During initialization,
each sounding profile is plotted using Green moisture profiles and Red temperature profiles. All winds are
plotted in Black along the right side. All calculated sounding profile parameters are plotted in light gray in
the data matrix box to the left of the sounding plots. Once initialization is complete, the first sounding of
the datafile is highlighted with bold profile plots and color-coded data parameters. The sounding profile
and data parameter colors can be configured by right-clicking over the area of interest. Scanning is
ccomplished by either: (1) using the Sounding Controller icons, (2) using Left/Right keyboard arrow keys,
or (3) using the mouse to drag the gray-colored marker along the bottom of the plotted sounding profiles.
32

Sounding Sequencer Display.

The Sounding Sequencer requires use of the optional Hodograph & Interactive program module.

The Sounding Sequencer is activated with the activation Icon (as seen on prior page) or by using the
DISPALYS' Menu "Sequencer" option. As with the Sounding Scanner display the Sequencer is only
available when viewing sounding files that contain multiple soundings. More importantly, this feature is
most useful when viewing time-series soundings of forecast profiles. The Sounding Sequencer can
display both sounding profiles (as seen below) and sounding hodographs.

The Sounding Sequencer displays 10 profiles in the file sequence, where each sequential profile is
progressively thinner and dimmer. Temperature profiles are Red and dew-point profiles are Green.
Profile sequencing is performed with either the mouse or keyboard arrows.

The Sounding Sequencer screen offers the user 3 unique display controls...

1. The Vanishing Plane size adjuster, which is located immediately to the right of the sequencer image.
Just move the vertical slider bar up & down accordingly.

2. The Vanishing Plane location adjuster, which is located immediately to the right of the Vanishing Plane
size adjuster. Just move the vertical slider bar up & down accordingly.

3. The sequence image Shifter Arrows, which are located immediately below the Vanishing Plane size &
location adjuster bars. These Left/Right arrow icons, when clicked, incrementally move the viewing
orientation left and right, which give the user perspective options when viewing unique profile sets.
33

Severe Weather Display. This is only available with the optional Analytic Module.

This example Severe Weather display is similar to the standard Sounding display, but also includes the
Hail/No Hail nomogram, the Storm Character nomogram, the Dry Microburst Potential nomogram, and
Storm Category chart. The Hail/No Hail nomogram supplements the Hail size parameter value that is
displayed within the column of weather parameters. This nomogram is a function of the Cloud Depth
Ratio*. The Storm Character nomogram graphically displays the correlation of CAPE (total) and Shear
(0-4km, AGL) values. This nomogram is often used by forecasters to evaluate overall storm potential.
The Dry Microburst nomogram correlates the 700 mb T/Td depression with the Upper Level Instability
Index (Mielke et al, 1987), which is designed to identify the potential for microburst activity from high-level
convective storms. The Storm Category chart is a visual representation of RAOB’s Severe Weather
Parameter Table’s summary data. Additional information can be displayed by right-clicking over any of the
four nomograms. With the optional Interactive Module, all graphic and text displays are automatically
updated as the soundings (profile and/or winds) are interactively modified.

*Note: The Hail / No Hail nomogram is a function of the Cloud Depth Ratio (CDR). The equation follows:

CDR = (Freezing Level – CCL) / (EL – CCL) where all heights are in millibars
34

Winter Weather Display. This is only available with the optional Analytic Module.

This example Winter Weather display is similar to the standard Sounding display, but also includes the
RICAPS Precipitation Donut, the Precip Type (Ptype) nomogram, and the Thermogram. The Precipitation
Donut is an interactive, graphic representation of precipitation type and intensity. The Precip Type
nomogram graphically displays the correlation of the 1000-850mb thickness (Y-axis) and the 850-700mb
thickness (X-axis). This multi-section nomogram is mostly used by forecasters in the mid-Atlantic U.S.
region to evaluate precipitation type during winter weather. The Thermogram graphically depicts
sounding layers that are above or below freezing (red or blue shading, respectively) with a green RH%
overlay plot. This aids analyses of frozen versus liquid precipitation. The user can right-click on any
nomogram or table for more information. With the optional Interactive Module, all graphic and text
displays are automatically updated as the sounding is interactively modified. Note: when RICAPS is not
active, then the Precipitation Donut is not available. RICAPS is activated from the below Options panel…
35

Fire/AQ Weather Display. This is only available with the optional Analytic Module.

This Fire-Danger / Air-Quality display was specifically designed to help monitor common atmospheric
problems and threats. This screen consists of six atmospheric threats, where each can be user
configured by right-clicking over any threat scale (color bar). The Ozone scale will only appear if the
analyzed sounding contains ozone data. The other five scales (Fire Danger, Dust Storm Threat, Pollution
Potential, Fog Probability, and Heat Stress or Wind Chill) will always appear on the screen.

Below is the configuration table that is displayed upon right-clicking the Fire-Danger scale. Note that the
Fire Danger index is a composite of 4 separate indices, all of which can be individually configured and
weighted for local conditions and requirements. The other threat configuration tabs are also available.
36

Tropical Weather Display. This is only available with the optional Analytic Module.

This Tropical Weather display was specifically designed to help with weather hazards in tropical and sub-
tropical environments. This screen consists of five nomograms, where each can be user configured by
right-clicking over any chart or nomogram (color bar) left of the sounding diagram. Note that the
"Thunderstorm Category" chart also appears on the Severe Weather display, while the "Heat Stress"
nomogram also appears on the Fire/AirQuality Weather display.

The "TC Tornado" index represents parameters that measure potential for tornado formation associated
with landfalling tropical cyclones (hurricanes & typhoons). The "Flooding" index can be applied to any
flood prone region in the world.

Below is the configuration table that is displayed upon right-clicking the "TC Tornado" scale. Note that this
index is a composite of 2 separate indices, all of which can be individually configured and weighted for
local conditions and requirements. The four other threat configuration tabs are also available.
37

Layer Analyzer. This is only available with the optional Analytic Module.

The Layer Analyzer allows the user to analyze key data at any layer of the plotted sounding. The two
vertical scroll bars allow definition of the layer’s top / bottom locations as the layer area is painted yellow.
As the scroll bar buttons are moved (up & down), layer data are simultaneously computed and displayed
in the “Active Data” box with the yellow border. The little square buttons located within the yellow border
permit the user to toggle data units. Data unit options are displayed as the mouse hovers over each
button. Note that the yellow layer (depth) can be locked by pressing the CTRL key while moving either the
Top or Bottom layer scroll button.

Just below the Active Data display box, are three command buttons that control the display of layer data.

1 - The “Capture Layer Data” button allows the user to create a frozen display of current layer data, which
is separately displayed to the right of the Active Data box in the “Captured Data” box, which is surrounded
by a pink-colored border. A pink-colored vertical bar is also produced alongside vertical scroll bar #2 to
visually identify the captured layer. This display option is useful for data/layer comparison purposes.

2 - The “Reset Layer Data” button erases the captured data box.

3 - The “Plot Significant Levels” command button is similar to the “Significant Levels” toolbar analyses
button, where the sounding’s significant levels (CCL, LCL, etc) are graphically displayed on the plotted
diagram. Once this button is used, it is disabled until the “Reset Layer Data” button is used.

NOTE: The Advanced Export module's "Mean Layers & Levels" tab allows exporting of the "layer"
parameters displayed in the above Layer Analyzer screen.
38

The following functions are only available with the optional Hodo / Interactive Module.

RAOB’s interactive data processing capabilities are available on the Sounding and Hodograph screens.
After changes are made, the sounding can be returned to its original values by clicking the “Restore”
menu option, or the changes can be permanently retained by using the “File” and “Save As” menu options.
If any of the sounding’s analyses options have been selected during the interactive session, all associated
text and graphic analyses displays will be simultaneously updated as the sounding data changes.

Sounding Screen. Use the mouse to click & drag any temperature plot point. Once the mouse is
released, the “red” sounding profile will stay in place while a “grey” line will mark the original location of the
sounding profile. Wind data can also be interactively modified. This is accomplished by first clicking on
the wind plot of interest, and then modified by using the keyboard’s cursor (or arrow) keys. See below…

This information box (at left) will appear after a

wind plot is selected with a mouse click, where
the numeric data identifies the selected wind
plot data. Wind speed is altered using the
Up/Down keys, while wind direction is altered
using the Left/Right keys. The ESC key is
used to exit the wind plot interactive mode.

Hodograph Screen. Use the mouse to click & drag any wind vector data point. Once the mouse is
released, the “red” wind plot will stay in place while a “grey” line will mark the original position. Like the
Sounding, the Hodograph’s wind plots can also be interactively modified using the keyboard’s cursor keys
(see above). Note that the Storm-Motion vector can also be interactively modified by click & drag actions
on the tip (arrow) of the vector.

The DALR (Dry Adiabatic Lapse Rate) option. Note: the DALR function is often used to define the “mixing
layer” or “mixing height”. Whenever the sounding’s surface temperature data is altered, a “Mix DALR
Layer” option will appear just below the diagram as a hot spot. When this hot spot is clicked, the DALR
options box is displayed (see below), from which the user can select one of two options.

When the “temperature” profile is mixed,

the lower sounding is redrawn using the
dry-adiabat associated with the surface
temperature, and extends to where the dry-
adiabat first intersects the sounding.
“Dewpoint” mixing is done by incorporating
proportional temperature changes through
the same dry-adiabatic layer.

The “Mixing Height” value can be displayed on the plotted sounding’s parameter listing. This is
accomplished by first calling the “Sounding Display Options” screen, then clicking on the “Analyses Data”
tab, then selecting the “Custom Data Displays” option. For best results, the surface temperature should
be adjusted to the expected maximum temperature for the day – or for the time period of interest.
39

Hodograph Display. This full-screen hodograph is only available with the optional Interactive Module.

The hodograph diagram is fully interactive. Just click & drag the hodograph wind vectors, the storm
motion vector, or click & keyboard change the wind plots to begin interactive changes. During interactive
activity, all analyses data and text listings are simultaneously updated, including the wind plots on the right
side of the screen. The wind data listing (at left) can be scrolled using the scroll buttons below the data
listing (shown only when the data list extends beyond the data box) or by using the keyboard’s cursor
(arrow) keys. The above example also displays the optional storm-motion wind vectors originating from
the Storm Motion vector. (Note: click on the Storm-Motion arrowhead in order to interactively drag the
vector.)

Hodograph hot-spot images …

… Click to expand (zoom) the hodograph to a full-screen image to better see diagram details. This
image is located at the upper-right corner of the hodograph.

… Click to switch display to the main sounding diagram screen. This image is located at the upper-
left section of the screen.

… Click to switch display to the Frontal Analysis screen. It is located at the upper-left section of the
screen. This image is only available with the optional Fronts & Forecast Module.

… Click to toggle “Ground-Relative” and “Storm-Relative” wind displays. This image is located at
the upper-right corner of the data listing box, which is located to the left of the Hodograph.
40

Hodograph Display - Options.

Diagram Size. Select Standard or

Expanded.

Range. Select “Same as Sounding” or

“Custom range” which allows specification
of the hodograph’s Top and Base limits.

Grid Type. Select Cross-hair, circles, or

both.

Grid Origin. “Centered” freezes origin

location, while “Data-Dependent” zooms in
on the quadrant with the most wind vectors.

Height Mode. Choose MSL or AGL.

Axes Scaling. When “Manual scaling” is

selected the user specifies the maximum
values (wind speed) to be displayed on the
cross-hair axes.

The example
at left uses
the above
selected
options. This
example is
drawn in the
Expanded
size. It also
includes the
Ground-
Relative wind
vectors, that
are drawn in
thin black
lines from the
graph origin.
41

Hodograph Display – Options (continued) …

Graph Lines. Select line thickness value.

Wind Speed. Knots or meters/second (m/s).

Data Units. Select Metric or English.

Plot a dot at each data point along

hodograph.
A user preference option.

Data Labels. Select whether data points are

identified with pressure or height labels.
Standard (std) pressure labels are 1000, 925,
850 mb, etc.

The example below uses the above selected

options. This example displays all wind vectors
through the entire sounding – from the surface
to 150 mb.
42

Hodograph Display – Options (continued) …

Plot Storm-Motion vector. Displays a

brown vector originating from the origin.

Plot storm-layer mean wind vector.

Displays wind layer as configured.

Print "Critical Angle" in a red color.

Method. Choose storm-motion type:

- Manual Method. Input desired vector

direction and speed. When selected, the
“Manual Storm-Motion Entry” vector box is
made available.

- Automatic Methods. Alter the Wind-

Layer depth for either method by using the
“Configure storm layer” command button.

--- Traditional method. Steering flow

options are also configurable with the
Command button.

--- Bunkers method. Also contains

options for the Left moving vector and
boundary layer plots.

The below example uses above selected options. Note the "Critical Angle" is printed in a red color.

The Critical Angle" is the

angle defined by the storm-
relative inflow vector at 10 m
and 10-500 m shear vector.
Studies show that the
tornadic storms, and in
particular the significant
tornadic storms, tended to
be characterized by angles
near 90°, whereas the non-
tornadic storms were not.
43

Hodograph Display – Options (continued) … Shears Bulk and Positive

Vectors. The ground-relative vectors are

drawn from the hodograph’s origin. The
storm-relative vectors are drawn from the
tip of the Storm-Motion vector. The Corfidi
Upshear (or MBE) & Downshear vectors are
drawn from the origin. The Up vector is
drawn in green; the Down vector is drawn in
blue.

Shear. Use this option to display up to 3

user specified wind shear layers in the lower
right corner of the diagram. The depth of
each shear layer can be user specified by
clicking on the Parameter Display Selector
button.

Helicity Contours. Choose depth and

interval options. They are drawn and
labeled in a light tan color. Note: the tip of
the Storm-Motion vector always coincides
with the helicity value displayed below the
diagram (not shown in this example). The
Effective Storm-Relative Helicity (ESRH)
option is discussed on the next page.

See example at left with above selected options.

Bulk Shear. Bulk shear is most commonly represented

by the vector difference between the winds at two
different levels. For example, the 4km bulk shear value
(seen left) is the difference between the surface and the
4-km winds. Note that each shear value is obtained by
dividing the vector difference by the layer depth – in this
case it is 4km.

Positive Shear. Positive shear is similar to Total Shear

(which is not calculated or displayed), except that only
the neutral and clockwise-curving shear segments are
summed, which is then normalized by the depth of the
shear layer. Conversely, negative shear uses the
neutral and counterclockwise- curving shear segments.
For a unidirectional hodograph, the total, positive, and
negative shear would be similar. For a purely clockwise
turning hodograph, the total and positive shear would be
similar, and the negative shear would be zero. (Bunkers
et al 2002)
44

Hodograph Display – Options (continued) …

Selection of the “Effective Storm-Relative Helicity” option results in the additional data display as indicated
below by the double arrow.

Selection of the Effective Storm-Relative Helicity (Effective SRH, or ESRH) informs RAOB to determine
the depth of the helicity layer as a function of the CAPE layer. Resulting SRH calculations take much
more processing time and will significantly slow down looping & multi-sounding operations. ESRH data is
automatically applied to the STP, VTP, and SCP composite indices. During interactive sessions, such as
altering wind vectors with click & drag operations, RAOB displays a status window (shown below)
indicating the extra processing time needed to calculate Effective SRH data.

Effective SRH calculations are only calculated if specifically selected from the Program Options (F9), the
Algorithm Options (Tab 2) option (see below).
45

Hodograph Display – Options (continued) …

Storm-Relative Anvil-Layer Wind Circles.

The Anvil Level SR (Storm Relative) winds and SR winds from 9-11-km are meant to discriminate
supercell type.

In general, upper-level SR winds less than 35 knots correspond to "high precipitation" supercells (blue
circle), 35-58 knots SR winds denote "classic" supercells (grey circle), while SR winds greater than 58
knots correspond to "low precipitation" supercells.
46

Hodogram (3-D trajectory) Display. This full-screen hodogram is only available with the optional
Hodograph & Interactive Module.

The hodogram is a trajectory diagram, showing the 3-dimensional voyage of the sounding balloon from
launch to burst. Since most sounding data do not list the time intervals between data levels, all
trajectories are calculated using a standard uniform ascent rate of 5 meters-per-second.

The hodogram is interactive in terms of graphical display only. The data cannot be altered, but the view
angles can be rotated manually or automatically. The hodogram can be rotated 360 degrees and/or
rotated 90 degrees into a vertical position. Hodogram angles can be adjusted using the four arrow buttons
located left of the diagram. The center “circle” button resets the diagram to its initial default orientation.
Hodogram angles can also be altered using the keyboard’s cursor (arrow) keys. The “Auto-Rotation”
button sets into motion continuous rotation of azimuth and tilt angles. This auto-rotation can be stopped
by again clicking the rotation button or by pressing the ESC key.

If the sounding wind data also contains the vertical motion component (W) data, then the Hodogram’s red
trajectory plot changes to Red segments for Upward motion and Blue segments for Downward motion.

The hodogram has its own

configuration options menu,
which can be accessed by
right-clicking while over the
diagram, or by using the
OPTIONS menu bar method.
The Hodogram’s configuration
options are shown at left.
47

Soaring Display.

The Soaring Menu option (when clicked) displays the Soaring analysis screen (shown below). The
sounding screen is modified in order to allow for the display of soaring data along the left side of the
plotted sounding.

The Soaring Menu Tool permits temperature, trigger height, and mathematical equation options. The
Calculate button displays results of selected data options, while the Diagram button allows re-configuration
of the diagram format and plotted sounding options.

By clicking on the Calculate button, various soaring data and indexes are displayed. The solid (red)
vertical bar between the sounding and the wind plot height scale represents the estimated lift altitude.

While important soaring and TI (thermal index) data are displayed along the left side of the sounding
diagram, the Report button produces a NWS-style "Soaring Guidance Report", which can be printed,
saved to file, and even emailed as an attached text file.

Details regarding diagram displays, algorithms and data options can be found in the SOARING
Calculations section located near the back of this Manual.
48

4.4 Listings. Provides eight different formats for displaying alphanumeric sounding data.
To display these listings, use the Display Menu option, or press the Space-Bar.

Summary Listing -- Tabular list of primary sounding data with icing & turbulence parameters.
Complete Listing -- Grouped list of significant sounding data associated with each data level.
Interval Listing -- View data levels via pressure or height and via user-defined intervals.
Data Analyses Listing -- List of key analyses and calculated parameters, such as inversions.
Severe Weather Parameter Table -- Displays a user-configurable significant weather parameter list.
Compare Indices Table – Comparison displays of Surface, Most-Unstable, and Mean Layer lifting.
CAPE Listing – Configurable table of CAPE values for any layer within the sounding profile.
Storm Table – Configurable listing of storm vectors, shear, and helicity values for specified layers.
Fog Table – Individually configure both Radiation and Advection fog types.

Summary Listing. Provides tabular data of key sounding parameters. Listing can be inverted, displayed
with optional temperature (C/F) units, or wind speed (kts/ms) units. A drop-down box offers a variety of
height units, including Feet, Meters, Miles in either MSL or AGL. Use the “Only display standard pressure
levels” checkbox option to filter the data display to only standard WMO pressure levels.

Complete Listing. This list is only available with the optional Analytic Module. This listing includes key
sounding data (observed and calculated) which pertain to individual data levels. As with the Summary
listing, several configuration options are available to the user.
49

Interval Listing. See the example image below. This listing’s drop-down box allows the user to define the
vertical interval in either Pressure, Feet, or Meters (AGL or MSL); after which another option box prompts
for the vertical interval value. The below example shows a vertical Pressure display in 10 mb intervals and
the corresponding interpolated temperature and wind data.

Data Analyses. This listing is only available with the optional Analytic Module. It provides key non-level
specific data, such as inversion layers, thickness layers, CAPE data, significant level information, and
many other analyses data that are not otherwise displayed. Program algorithm parameter settings are
also displayed at the end of this listing.

Severe Weather. Provides a tabulated display of weighted severe weather parameters and the resultant
categories of Weak, Moderate, and Strong potential. The example (at the top of the next page) only
shows the last 13 parameters available to the user. Parameter “weights” and “threshold limits” are all
user-definable through the Severe Weather Table configuration menu option. The results from this table
can also be graphically displayed on the plotted sounding using the Analyze Menu option described next.

The Storm Category box at left is an example of the graphical

representation of the summarized tabular data from the Severe Weather
Parameter Table (shown on next page). This Storm Category box is
automatically displayed when viewing the Severe Weather Sounding
Display screen (see Displays Options for more information).
50

Severe Weather Tab (continued) …

Compare Indices. This listing provides a comparison table of severe weather parameters with respect to
the three modes of parcel lifting: Surface-Based (SB), Most-Unstable (MU), and Mean-Layer (ML). The
asterisks (*) that follow some of the parameter values indicate that they exceed the “moderate” potential
threshold for severe weather (as defined by the user in the Severe Weather Parameter Configuration
Table, viewed via Menu shortcut F12).
51

CAPE Listing. This listing is similar to the “Interval Listing” display, but its primary purpose is to present
CAPE values for any sounding layer or thickness. CAPE values for each layer are displayed, including the
accumulative CAPE from the surface level. Layers can be defined by Pressure, Meters, or Feet and by
AGL or MSL. This example shows CAPE values for layers defined by at every 1,000 Feet, AGL.

Storm Table. The Storm Table is only available with the optional Hodograph & Interactive module. It
provides important storm vector, shear, storm-relative helicity, CAPE values for specified layers. The
“Inflow” values reflect the vector difference between the Storm Motion vector and the Mean wind vectors
(shown in the table). The “kts / m/s” button allows toggling of the wind speed units. Storm-motion and
Parcel information are also displayed at the bottom of the table. Easy access configuration buttons are
also provided for the Storm-motion and Parcel lifting parameters.
52

Fog Table. This tab lists the separate configuration parameters for both the Radiation and Advection fog
types. The percentage probabilities for both types are listed at the bottom of the table.

Fog Table (continued)…

The below image shows how the “Configure” button will activate the “Fog Table” configuration panels.
53

4.5 Analyze. This menu option displays a floating toolbar from which several analysis options can be
toggled on/off. This toolbar can also be activated by pressing the right mouse button over the area to the
left of the sounding diagram. See the chapter on SOUNDING ANALYSES for detailed explanations how
the parameters are calculated and their typical usage. Use of a widescreen monitor is recommended.

The Analyze toolbar shown below will normally be the first method used to analyze the plotted sounding.
Each tool option presents graphical (and in some cases text) displays overlaid on top of the plotted
sounding. Each analysis display item can be removed (toggled on/off) by clicking the tool button. Most of
the toolbar’s selections have configurable options which can be accessed by right-clicking on the button.

The LEFT toolbar column “Sounding Chart” buttons only

apply to the standard sounding (skew-t) diagram. The
RIGHT toolbar column “Soundingram” buttons only
apply if the “Wide” Analyses Box option is selected as
shown below in the Sounding Diagram Options menu.

The “Wide” Analyses Box option can only be

selected if the computer display screen is
capable of widescreen graphics.

If the “Narrow” Analyses Box option is

selected, then the last 6 buttons on the
LEFT column (which are grayed out)
will then become active.

The “Auto-Load Analyses” button (when activated) will direct the RAOB program to automatically display
currently selected analyses upon future reactivation of the RAOB program. When this button is selected,
the button’s caption changes to “Remove Auto-Load”, which then permits de-selection of this option.
54

Analyze Toolbar – Left Column ...

The sounding toolbar show below is the standard LEFT column (as seen on the previous page), which
applies to any plotted sounding diagram (skewt, emagram, or tephigram).

* The first 3 options (Significant Levels, Lift Parcel, and CAPE) display a
combination of graphic & text overlays. The Lift & CAPE options display parcel
trace lifting sequences and potential energy (color-coded red & blue) shading
between the parcel trace and the sounding profile. If the sounding has no
CAPE, then the third button’s caption changes to “NO CAPE”.

The next 10 options (High CAT, Shear CAT, Wave CAT, LLWS, Thermal, ICE,
Carburetor Icing, Clouds, Lightning & Contrails) graphically overlay designated
analyses along the left side of the diagram. Intensity, magnitude, or coverage of
each data item increases from left to right and graphically represent visual
depictions of numerical source data which can be viewed using RAOB’s Listings
Menu option, which presents data in a convenient tabular format.

Note: The Wave CAT button is only available with the optional Turbulence &
Mountain-Wave Module. Output is similar to the CAT displays.

Below the Contrails option are the Inversions, Fog Layer, and Frontal Layer
buttons. The Inversions button will display inversions using a combination of
graphics (blue-shaded depth) & text overlays (specifying the inversion-type).
Fog layers will be displayed as Wet, Freezing, or Ice fog types. The Frontal
Layer button displays the predominant Warm or Cold front layer as determined
by the hodograph’s thermal wind vectors.

Note: The Frontal Layer button is only available with the optional Fronts &
Forecast Module. Output is similar to the “Inversions” layers.

The next 3 options (Tropopause, Freezing Line, and Mixing Height) display
colored horizontal lines (respectively: purple, blue, orange) at the appropriate
diagram height. Only the Freezing Line and Mixing Height options have
configurable options, which can be displayed by right-clicking the toolbar button.

The next 3 options (WetBulb, FrostPoint, and Virtual Temp Profiles) display
color-coded vertical profiles of the sounding’s selected item. Like all other
options, they can also be toggled on/off.

The last 6 options (Wind Speed, Wind Shear, Relative Humidity, E-Theta
{equivalent potential temp}, Refractivity {& ducting}), & Ozone graphically overlay
(in either a line and/or bar format) data to the right of the Stability Bars. These
data items are displayed in the diagram’s Analyses Box, near the plotted winds.

___________________________________________________________________________________
* The following buttons are only available with the optional Analytical Module: CAPE, High-CAT, CAT,
LLWS, Thermal, ICE, Carburetor Icing, Clouds, Lightning, Contrails, Fog Layers, Profiles, Wind
Speed/Shear, Relative-Humidity, E-Theta, and Refractivity.
55

Analyze Lift Options (only available with the Optional Interactive Module).

When the “Lift Parcel” analyze button

(left) is selected and the Parcel Lift
Configuration option for “Multiple
prompt” (right) is selected, then three
types of lifting options become
available … parcel lifting, layer lifting,
and sounding lifting.

Press F9 (then Tab 3)

This special "Lifting Options" panel, which is only

available with the optional Interactive Module, is
activated after pressing the Lift Parcel toolbar button
shown above. This display prompts the user to select
the sounding’s surface pressure level or input a specific
pressure level for parcel lifting calculations and
associated graphic displays.

Selection of the “Display parameter…” option produces

a printed listing of each lifting sequence at the top of the
sounding diagram.

This special Lifting Options panel, which is only

available with the optional Interactive Module, is
activated after pressing the Lift Parcel toolbar button
shown above. This display prompts the user to select or
input the number of millibars (hPa) to adjust (up or
down) a specified layer of the sounding. (Winds are
also height adjusted.)

Temperatures are lifted dry-adiabatically and dewpoints

are lifted along their mixing-ratio lines until saturated,
after-which temperatures and dewpoints are lifted moist-
adiabatically. This method is also used for the “Lift
Sounding” option discussed next.

This special Lifting Options panel, which is only

available with the optional Interactive Module, is
activated after pressing the Lift Parcel toolbar button
shown above. This display prompts the user to select or
input the number of millibars (hPa) to adjust (up or
down) the entire sounding. (Winds are also height
adjusted.)

This option is great for simulating sounding passage up

and down mountainous terrain.
56

Analyze Toolbar – Right Column . . .

The sounding toolbar show at left is the optional RIGHT column (of the
two-column toolbar shown a prior page), which applies graphic analyses
when the wide-screen display option is used. In the wide-screen display
mode, the Analyses Box is expanded into a soundingram-style graph box
that is located between the sounding profile and the wind plot – as shown
below. Unlike the Left Column analyses button options, where multiple
analyses can be overlaid, these analyses can only be displayed one at a
time. If multiple analyses need to be plotted on this type of diagram, then
the optional Soundingram module must be used.

All analyses buttons can be configured. Configuration options are

displayed by right-clicking on the button of interest.

The seven buttons labeled Liquid Water, Vapor Density, Ozone, Omega,
and Extra #1 & #2 & #3 are grayed out because those data types are not
available with the example sounding image below.

Note: The Extra #1 & #2 & #3 buttons will display/analyze data items that
are decoded from Aerosol data, or which are made available when using
RAOB’s CSV Data Format, which is explained near the end of this
manual.

=====================================================

The example wide-screen display shown below was made possible by

selecting the Analyses Box: “Wide (Soundingram)” option from the
Diagram Options menu. The “Theta-E” analysis plot was created by
selecting the “Theta-E” analysis button from the Right-Column of the
Analyses Toolbar.
57

Analyze Toolbar – Hazards Display . . .

When the analyses of the Toolbar's "right column" is refreshed (or erased), the Hazards Display is then
displayed by default -- until the next right column Toolbar button is activated. RAOB displays the Hazards
within the Soundingram section, which is just to the right of the sounding diagram. It contains a blue sky
background, with clouds and other significant hazards. See the below example. The Hazards Display is
only functional when the RICAPS cloud generation option is selected in RAOB's Program Options.

Note: The above Hazards display requires use of a wide-screen monitor.

By right-clicking the mouse while over the Hazards Display, a Hazards configuration options panel is
displayed, as seen below. These options let the user individually configure each hazard to local
conditions.
58

4.6 Merge: the Standard Merge Module.

The Merge menu presents the user with two options: (1) Create a single merge sounding, and (2) Create
a time-series file containing many merged soundings. The first option is available with the optional
Standard and Advanced Merge modules (as explained below), while the second option is only available
with the Advanced Merge module (as explained on the next page).

st
Selection of the 1 MERGE menu option opens the above data selection display. Use the Add a
Sounding button to list up to 6,000 soundings. The operation of this display is identical to that used to
create vertical cross-section datasets (explained later this manual).

Use the Merge Soundings button to begin the merge process. RAOB automatically determines the new
station elevation and latitude & longitude coordinates, and then adds this information to the new data file.
All significant temperature data are maintained in the merged sounding. Additionally, standard significant
pressure levels (i.e., 1000, 850, etc.) are added to the merged sounding, if missing. All significant wind
data are also maintained in the merged sounding. However, if the sounding has less than 4 winds, then
RAOB automatically interpolates wind data at 2,000 foot intervals, MSL. The resulting merged sounding
data will always be saved using RAOB’s indigenous RAW format.

Once data merging is complete, the resulting

merged sounding is displayed and the
Supplemental Sounding Data panel (at left) is
presented. Sounding coordinates, elevation, and
sounding description can be edited as needed.

From the Display Options section, you can also

view a “spaghetti” plot of all source soundings, or
view “standard deviation” bars for reference.

The Mean and Standard Deviation Data button

provides a text listing of S.D. data.

A checkbox near the bottom of the display permits a

text listing of all soundings used to create the
merged sounding.

Note that this Supplemental Sounding Data display

can be recalled with any plotted sounding. It can be
found under the sounding diagram’s Edit menu.

Another feature of the Standard Merge module is included with the Batch & Timer functions, where RAOB
automatically merges 2 soundings from 2 different paths to create a single composite sounding, where
pressure & temperature data taken from one sounding, and height & wind data are taken from the other.
59

Merge (continued): the Advanced Merge Module.

nd
Selection of the 2 MERGE menu option opens the RAOB Merge Utility, which is only available with the
optional Advanced Merge module.

This module will ingest two time-series multi-file soundings and merge them into one multi-sounding
datafile. Temperature/pressure data will be taken from the first file, while Wind/height data will be taken
from the second file. Except for binary data, the two input datafiles can be from any data format that the
RAOB Program can process. For example, you can merge Temperature data from radiometer soundings
and wind data from wind profiler soundings. All merged output files will be hydrostatically balanced.

Special Notes: If the Temperature based sounding data contains Liquid-Water and Vapor-Density data, or
if it contains RAOB’s CSV “extra” data types, they will also be merged. If the Wind based sounding data
contains vertical wind component (W) data, it will also be merged. The special Merge couplets option
ignores the temperature data path and only merges wind couplets having Hi and Low data profiles.

This optional program module (RAOBMERGE.EXE) is unique because it runs independently of the RAOB
program; however, it must be located in the same computer system folder as the RAOB.EXE program file.

Once the merged sounding files are created, you can then use RAOB's Real-Time Data Processing
module to automatically display and update time-section diagrams using the "Single Sounding" files. Time-
section diagrams can be created with RAOB's Cross-Section module by using the appended "Multi-
Sounding" data files.
60

Merge (continued): the Advanced Merge Module.

Below image shows menu option to merge Vaisala Ozone with corresponding Vaisala Sounding data.

4.7 Refresh (and Restore).

^
The REFRESH menu item immediately clears all overlaid analyses information (graphics & text). The
RESTORE menu item appears whenever the sounding profile is graphically modified.

4.8 Zoom (and Stop-Zoom & Un-Zoom).

These two menu options are only available with RAOB’s optional Interactive/Hodograph Module. The
ZOOM menu option, when clicked, activates a new mouse cursor, which contains the word “zoom” next to
a cross-hair image. Once Zoom is activated, the Zoom instructions box (seen above) is displayed.

Zoom-In – Left Click. Zoom-Out – Right Click.

At the same time, the “Zoom” Menu item changes, as the “Stop-Zoom” Menu item and the “Un-Zoom”
Menu item are added to the menu bar. By clicking on the Stop-Zoom item, all prior menu items are
restored for use, such as data listings and analyses options. By clicking on the Un-Zoom item, the
sounding profile is immediately restored to its original diagram scaling settings. Also, all of RAOB’s
interactive capabilities and analyses overlay options remain functional during zoom activities.

Note: ZOOM does not work with the Tephigram diagram, because it’s coordinate equations are complex.
61

4.9 Compare.

Compare Another Sounding*. Permits detailed analytical comparison of two soundings. Data analyses
are displayed side-by-side along with wind data plots and hodograph plot (if configured). The first
sounding is plotted in red and the second sounding is plotted in blue. If the hodograph display option is
active, it will always be drawn in the upper-right corner of the sounding diagram.

Overlay Multiple Soundings*. Permits overlays of up to 4 other soundings including plotted wind data.
Each sounding and associated wind data are drawn in different colors. Note that data analyses are not
available for this display (since there isn’t enough room on the screen). The hodograph is also not
available for this display, since there would be too much clutter. This and the above "Compare Another"
option has a LIFT option for additional comparison purposes.

ISA Sounding. Plots the International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) reference line. The International
Standard Atmosphere (ISA) Sounding is a hypothetical vertical distribution of atmospheric temperature
(and other properties) which, by international agreement (ICAO & WMO), is taken to be representative of
the atmosphere. The air is assumed to obey the perfect gas law and the hydrostatic equation. The ISA
line can be configured to always appear on all sounding diagrams through use of the Diagram
Configuration options, which is accessible from the Options Menu Bar.

Reference Sounding. Plots the “reference sounding” as identified by the user. This sounding, which can
be any single sounding data file, must be saved using the REFERENCE.DAT name. This is useful for
comparing sounding profiles against a local, user-defined standard.

Pressure/Height Values*. Displays height data along the left inside margin of the diagram over the
primary pressure grid lines. These values directly align with the values of the height scale plotted to the
right of the diagram. Note that all height scales are hydrostatically coupled to pressure level data, thereby
ensuring exact pressure-height readings. Each sounding, therefore, will have its own unique height scale.

Height Correction Line*. This line displays a graphical representation of height corrections associated with
the plotted sounding. This line, used by some aviation interests, plots the pressure height values (ft/1000)
with respect to the °C temperature scale.

Contrail Threshold Line*. This line identifies the threshold area for contrail formation. If the sounding
profile line falls left (or colder) than the threshold line, then there exists favorable potential for contrail
formation. This line can be used in conjunction with the ANALYSES’ Contrail option to better visualize
contrail potential.

__________________________________________________________________________________

* These comparison tools are only available with the optional Analytic Module.
62

4.10 Options.
Details of each of the following options menus
(except the Loop Options) can be found in the
following sections of this user manual. Loop
options are presented at the bottom of this
page.

Diagram Options. Offers grid, unit, scaling,

format, data, reference lines, and graphical
display options. These options can also be
displayed by clicking the ‘right’ mouse button
when over the sounding diagram.

Program Options. Offers various system-wide

options regarding screen displays, algorithm
options, parcel lifting, energy calculation
options, and many other configuration settings
for various applications.

Loop Options.* Looping is only available with datafiles that contain multiple soundings (see below).
Freezing & Hazards Options. Offer several user controls for plotting and display purposes.
Weather Alert Editor. Allows the user to select specific alerts, which are displayed in a pop-up window.
Severe Weather Table. Allows customization of the weighting factors and threshold values of key indices.
Fog Layer Editor & Index Table. Permit configuration options for Radiation & Advection fog types.
Cloud Layer Table. Offers manual or automatic cloud layer generation and precipitation modes.
Start Diagnostic Log. This option is only used during ERS-directed problem solving coordination.
Copy Settings File. Used for special ERS-directed program diagnostic purposes.
Program Modules. Used to activate newly purchased optional program modules.
Password. Allows the user to assign a startup password to the RAOB program.

* These options control automatic sequential looping of data files containing multiple soundings.
63

5. DIAGRAM CONFIGURATION.

5.1 TAB 1 – Format.

Diagram Type.

Skew-T (Log-P). Commonly

used worldwide. Best for
soundings 100 mb and below.
Co-option exists which
automatically produces an
Emagram diagram for
soundings that extend above
100 mb.

The Emagram and Tephigram

diagrams are discussed below.

Emagram (or adiabat chart). Best for soundings that extent above 100 mb and best for viewing inversions
at all levels. A co-option exists for temperature grid displays. (This diagram is similar to the Stuve chart.)

Tephigram. Although similar to the Skew-T chart and commonly used in the UK, Canada and some other
countries, it is the only sounding diagram which has thermodynamically proportional areas. In other
words, any area on the diagram is completely proportional to energy – this is especially useful for viewing
CAPE-shaded areas. However, due to the complexity of this diagram’s construction algorithms, RAOB’s
diagram scaling options are very limited. When graphic analyses are applied to a Tephigram plot, the
“Display warning message …” option warns that the displayed analyses of certain parameters (such as
CAT, icing, etc.) are only vertically proportional (true) to the pressure scale of the Skew-T and Emagram
diagrams. This is because the Tephigram’s pressure grid is composed of curved versus straight lines.
64

Diagram Options. (Tab 1 Continued)

Stability Bars or Wind Bar. Stability Bars are drawn as thin colored vertical bars drawn between the plotted
winds and the temperature profile. They are color-coded indicators of lapse rate classification of the
plotted sounding segments. From left to right, the Stability Bar color codes are:

Color Lapse-Rate (LR) of the Sounding

Red Auto-convective: LR > 34.1 °C / km
Yellow Unstable (super-adiabatic): LR > dry-adiabatic
Green Conditionally unstable: dry-adiabatic > LR > saturation
Blue Stable: LR < saturation-adiabat

The Wind Bar option produces a single vertical representation of wind-speed as a colored
gradient, which is user-configurable to better emphasize specific wind speed ranges and layers.

Height Scale. This height scale is drawn immediately to the left of the plotted winds. As with all RAOB
program height scales, each scale is hydrostatically coupled to the sounding’s pressure levels.

Wind Plot Box. This is the area immediately to the right of the Height Scale, where the sounding’s winds
are plotted. This box must be selected if the sounding’s winds are to be plotted and displayed.

Draw Surface Line. This line extends beyond the left wall of the sounding diagram, where station
elevation, surface altimeter setting (QNH), and density altitude (DA) information are displayed.

Display elevation layer. When this option is checked, a tan-colored layer is displayed which represents the
surface elevation (or ground layer above sea level) of the sounding station.

Always draw 925, 850, 250, 150 pressure lines. This option produces reference lines for all standard
TTAA pressure levels, including 925, 850, 250, and 150 millibars (hPa).

Analyses Box*. The following Analyses options are graphically overlaid in the area to the right of the
Stability Bars. Each item can be displayed (toggled on/off) using the ANALYSES’ Tool Bar.

Wind Speed. Line graph of relative wind speeds.

Wind Shear. Line graph of relative wind shear values.
Relative Humidity. Line graph of relative "relative-humidity" (RH) values.
E-Theta. Line graph of relative equivalent potential temperatures.
Refrac. Line graph of Refractivity N-units. "Trapping" layer is highlighted in Red.
Ozone. Line graph of Ozone data when present with sounding data.

* The above 6 Analyses Box options are available with the “Narrow” display option. See the next page for
a discussion of display features available when using the “Wide” display option.

Cursor Data.
Parcel. Provides continuous display of sounding data values. Located at upper-left of screen.
Diagram. Provides continuous display of diagram grid values. Located at mid-left of screen.

Height Mode.
Select either MSL (mean sea level) or AGL (above ground level) for the height scales and other related
parameters.

UVW Wind Diagram Options. These options determine if the standard sounding diagrams (skewt,
emagram, or tephigram) will be displayed or the unique UVW wind diagram will be displayed. Further
discussion and examples are presented on the page after next.
65

Analyses Box (Wide Display) option…

Using the Analyses Box “Wide” option

as shown at left, the below example
sounding diagram will be plotted – if
using a wide-screen monitor. The
analyses box is essentially expanded
into a soundingram-type format.

The below sounding diagram image uses the “Wide” Analyses Box display, which expands the Analyses
Box between the Stability Bars and the Wind Plot Box. This feature requires a widescreen monitor.

When using the “Wide” Analyses Box display, a double panel Toolbar becomes available. The left column
of the Toolbar is always present, but the right column (labeled Soundingram) applies to the expanded
Analyses Box. This Soundingram-style display allows better visualization of supplemental sounding data,
such as Theta and Virtual temperatures. Each Toolbar button will present data configuration options by
right-clicking on the button of interest.

Note that the special parameters (Liquid Water, Vapor Density, Ozone, Omega, and Extra #1 & #2 & #3)
are only available if present with the source sounding datafile.
66

UVW Wind Diagram Options…

The UVW diagram was specifically created to graphically

display 3-dimentional wind data: commonly referred to as
U-V-W, wind components – where the W component
represents the vertical wind.

Standard diagram only. This option always displays standard sounding diagrams: including skewt,
emagram, and tephigram diagrams.

Automatic diagramming. This option will display standard diagrams if temperature data are present, but
the UVW diagram will be displayed if only wind data are present.

UVW diagram only. This option always displays the UVW diagram, even if temperature data are present.
An example of the UVW diagram is shown below.

The above UVW diagram consists of 3 sections. Section 1 (left most diagram) consists of the common
sounding wind plot (UV data) with colored shading of the vertical (W) component, with blue shading for
downward motion and red shading for upward motion. Section 2 (middle diagram) consists of a
soundingram type display of the UVW wind components for simultaneous comparison purposes. Section
3 (right most diagram) is the common hodograph, but with colored vectors representing upward and
download motion by the red and blue colors, respectively.
67

5.2 TAB 2 – Pressure & Temperature.

Pressure (& Hgt).

Upper Millibar Limit. Use the up/down arrow keys to select the highest mb level (0.001 to 1000 mb) to be
displayed on the sounding diagram. Note: the Tephigram is preset to 100 mb.
Lower Millibar Limit. Selects the lowest mb level for the sounding diagram, but not for the Tephigram.
This lower limit setting can not be saved as a configuration item.

Auto-Select. Use these options to have RAOB automatically determine the diagram’s upper / lower limits.

Grid. Select Millibars, Kilometers, Feet, or Statue Miles for the vertical scale. For the Millibars option, mb
or hPa units can be selected as the system-wide default via Program Options configuration. Note: The
Tephigram diagram grid is preset to Millibar units.

Interval. Select either automatic or predetermined intervals depending on selected Grid.

Temperature.

Grid. Select either °C (Celsius) or °K (Kelvin) or °F (Fahrenheit).

Selection of the “Dual scale” option displays both (°C and °F) temperature scales.

Interval. Select either 10° or 1° temperature intervals.

Scaling. Select either Automatic or Manual temperature scaling of the sounding diagram's temperature
scale. If Manual is selected, the user must select the Minimum and Maximum temperatures used to scale
the diagram. Note: the Tephigram has preset pressure and temperature scaling.
68

5.3 TAB 3 – Adiabats.

Standard Reference Lines.

The following three reference lines are typically found on thermodynamic diagrams.

Dry Adiabats. Lines of constant potential temperature, used to lift a parcel dry-adiabatically. These lines
are often used to identify the maximum surface convective temperature and many other significant
parameters which uniquely define each sounding.

Saturation Adiabats. Lines of constant wet-bulb potential temperature, used to lift a parcel moist-
adiabatically. These lines are often used to define CAPE areas and other energy parameters.

Saturation Mixing Ratios. Lines of constant mixing ratio, used to graphically identify key thermodynamic
parameters. These lines are often used to help define hail potential and many other moisture related
parameters.

Line Options: Color, Style, or Reset. Select line colors/style or reset to default parameters.

None. No lines are drawn.

Some. Some lines are drawn.
All. All available lines are drawn.

Labels. Displays numeric values on the Lines selected for display.

Plot and highlight a user-specified reference line. For each of the above three reference lines, the user
can specify any line value to be drawn on the sounding diagram. It will be drawn in the same color
selected for that type of reference line, but this “specified” line will be drawn in a larger (thicker) format for
easier visual identification. The user can also select whether this specified line will be labeled.
69

5.4 TAB 4 – Sounding Data.

T/Td = Temperature/Dewpoint data.

T/Td Plots. Select display of T/Td dots and/or circles on the diagram.

T/Td Lines. Select line thickness from a range of 1 – 9.

Td Lines. Select none, dashed, or solid dewpoint profiles.

Print “m” for Missing dewpoint data. This is the conventional method used to indicate missing
dewpoint values on a plotted sounding diagram.

Color Selections. The user can select colors for Temperature, Dewpoint, Lifted Parcels, Wetbulb,
FrostPpoint, and Virtual temperature profiles plotted on the Sounding diagram. Note: the last 4
profiles can only be plotted on the sounding diagram by using the Analyze Toolbar’s option buttons.

Wind Plots. Select display of shafts and/or dots at origin of wind plot.

Wind Display. Shafts & Feathers. Conventional wind plot display.

Variable Shafts. Shaft length denotes relative wind speed, since feathers are
not drawn.

Wind Speed. Select knots (kts) or meters-per-second (m/s) for wind speed plots, which are plotted to the
right of the sounding diagram.
70

5.5 TAB 5 – Analyses Data. Analyses data appear in the upper-right portion of the sounding diagram.
Use of the Custom Data Displays selector allows the user complete control of displayed data items.

Select the “Classic” or newer “Custom Data Displays” When the “Custom Data Displays” button
display options. Also select options for MSL/AGL and (shown upper-left) is selected, the above
Metric/English units. The PT/ePT units option applies Parameter Selector editor is presented.
to the ‘RAOB cursor Data’ box, which is displayed to See the following pages for listings of
the left of the sounding diagram. available parameters.

======================================================================
Below is an example of the “Classic Display” data analyses listing (including data grouping annotations).
TROP Lvl: Tropopause height
FRZG Lvl: Freezing level
cclEL Hgt: CCL-based EL
lfcEL Hgt: LFC-based EL
LFC Hgt: Level of Free Convection
CCL Hgt: Convective Condensation Level
LCL Hgt: Lifted Condensation Level
Water: Water content of column
Hail: Hail size (estimated)
T2Gust: Convective gust potential
WindEx: Microburst potential
SWEAT: Severe Weather Threat Index
CAP: similar to LID index Main Data,
Boyden: UK thunderstorm index & Indices
S{TT}: German thunderstorm index European Indices
KO: German thunderstorm index
LI: Lifted Index
TT: Total Totals
KI: K-Index
Tc: Convective temperature (sfc)
Storm: Storm motion (estimated)
s-rH: Helicity (per layer)
CAPE: Convective Available Potential Energy Helicity,
CIN: Convective Inhibition Energy CAPE,
VGP: Vorticity Generation Parameter etc.
EHI: Energy Helicity Index
MVV: Maximum Vertical Velocity
BRN: Bulk Richardson Number
LPL: Lifted Parcel Level
FOG FSI: Fog Stability Index
Threat: Radiation fog potential Fog Indices
Point: Radiation fog formation temperature
71

Analyses Data: Custom Data Displays (continued) …

Sounding parameter display options. Any combination or sequence of the following parameters can be
selected for display in the upper-right corner of the sounding diagram.

BlankSpace: Insert a blank half-space MDPI: Microburst Day Potential Index

850/700/500 mb Temp: Selected temperatures Mean DPD: Mean T-Td Depression (Sfc-750mb)
850/700/500 mb Hgt: Selected heights Mean RH: Mean Relative Humidity (Sfc–750 mb
700 mb: Wind & Dewpoint Depression MeanMixRat: Mean mixing ratio
700-500 LR: 700-500 mb lapse-rate (°C/km) Mean RH: Mean Relative Humidity (Sfc-750mb)
Boyden: European (UK) thunderstorm index Mixing Hgt: Mixing height (function of the DALR)
BRN: Bulk Richardson Number MPL Prs: Maximum Parcel Level pressure
BRN Shear: Bulk Richardson Number shear MPL Hgt: Maximum Parcel Level height
CAP: Convective limit or Lid Index MVV: Maximum Vertical Velocity
CAPE total: Convective Available Potential Energy NCAPE: Normalized CAPE
CAPE+ only: Positive CAPE only RPM: RAOB Parameter Metric (for severe weather)
CAPE 0-xkm: CAPE for a specified layer S{TT}: S-Index, European thunderstorm potential
CAPE..Hail: CAPE within the –10 to –30 °C layer Severity: Thunderstorm Severity Index
CCL Hgt: Convective Condensation Level Shear xkm: Wind shear (default system vector)
Ceiling: Cloud ceiling height Shear1 xkm: 1st shear depth (sounding & hodo)
Chandler: Chandler Burning Index (CBI) Shear2 xkm: 2nd shear depth (sounding & hodo)
CIN total: Convective INhibition Energy (CAPE-) Shear3 xkm: 3rd shear depth (sounding & hodo)
Corfidi/Dn: Down/shear – forward shear vector. SHIP: Significant Hail Parameter.
Corfidi/Up: Up/shear – also called MBE vector SI: Showalter Index
Craven: Craven SigSvr Parameter (ML-lifting only) Stn Elev: Station elevation
CT: Cross Totals index Storm: Severe storm motion vector
DCAPE 6km: Downdraft CAPE for 6km MSL STP: Significant Tornado Parameter
DCI: Deep Convective Index Supercell: Supercell Composite Parameter (SCP)
Delta ePT: Delta Theta-e, wet microburst potential s-rH 0-3km: Storm-relative Helicity (0-3km layer)
DMP Gust: Dry Microburst Potential - Gust s-rH 0-2km: Storm-relative Helicity (0-2km layer)
DMPI: Dry Microburst Potential Index s-rH 0-1km: Storm-relative Helicity (0-1km layer)
DownRush-T: Surface DownRush Temperature SR 0-2km: Storm Relative (low-level) wind
ESRH: Effective Storm-Relative Helicity SR 4-6 km: Storm Relative (mid-level) wind
EHI 0-xkm: Energy Helicity Index, at specified layer SR 9-11km: Storm Relative (anvil-level) wind
GOES HMI: GOES Hybrid Microburst Index SWEAT: Severe WEAther Threat index
cclEL Hgt: CCL-based Equilibrium level T1Gust: Thunderstorm gust potential (T1 method)
lfcEL Htb: LFC-based Equilibrium level T2Gust: Thunderstorm gust potential (T2 method)
Flooding: RAOB flood/flash-flood potential Tc: Convective temperature (function of CCL)
FireDanger: Fire Danger Index (FDI) TCTP~UNC: Tropical Cyclone Tornado Parameter (from UNC)
Fog DisTmp: Fog Dissipation Temperature Temp Base: Temperature lift method (dry or wet)
Fog FSI: Fog Stability Index THI: Temperature-Humidity Index
Fog Point: Fog formation temperature TI: Thompson Index
Fog Threat: Fog potential Tornado~TC: RAOB tropical cyclone tornado potential
Fog~Advect: Advection Fog potential TQ Index: Low-topped convection potential
Fog~Radiat: Radiation Fog potential TransportM: Mean mixing-layer wind
FRZG Lvl: Freezing level TransportP: Peak mixing-layer wind
Hail: Hail diameter TROP Lvl: First tropopause level
Haines: Haines index (also called LASI) TT: Total Totals index
Heat Burst: Heat Burst Index (HBI) Vent Index: Ventilation index
HI: Humidity Index VGP 0-xkm: Vorticity Generation Parameter
Inv DisTmp: Inversion Dissipation Temperature VirtTempCor: Virtual Temperature Correction
JI: Jefferson index VT: Vertical Totals index
KI: K-Index VTP: Violent Tornado Parameter
KO: KO-Index, European thunderstorm potential Water: Total precipitable water of column
LCL Hgt: Lifting Condensation Level height Waterspout1: Charleston (NWS) Index for southeastern US
LFC Hgt: Level of Free Convection height Waterspout2: Szilagyi (SWI) Index for US Great Lakes region
LFC-LCL: LFC/LCL height difference (meters) Waterspout3: Key West (NWS) Florida probability index
LI: Lifted Index WBZ Hgt: Wet-Bulb Zero Height
Lift Mode: Parcel lifting method (via configuration) WCD: Warm Cloud Depth (km)
Lift Type: LFC or CCL lifting method employed WindEX: Microburst gust potential
LPL: Lifted parcel level (mb) Wind Chill: Equivalent temperature due to wind
WMSI: Wet Microburst Severity Index

For those above parameters that are listed in the Severe Weather Parameter Table (shortcut F12), they
can be color coded with respect to the Low, Moderate, or High severity thresholds.
72

Example of several “Custom Data Displays” parameters.

This example uses the “BlankSpace” (which is a half-space blank line) to help group similar parameters.

The Parameter Display editor (left) is

accessed by right-clicking the mouse
while hovering over the sounding’s
data listing. Here the user can define
which data are displayed and the
sequence of data items.

The “Edit Units” checkbox allows the

user to define data units, which over-
ride any system defaults. Note that
not all data have units options (such
as SWEAT).

The “Columns” box option is

discussed on the next page.

The “Alerts” box displays the

Weather Alert Editor to configure
automatic detection of thresholds.
73

Example of dual-column “Custom Data Displays”, plus Right-side Hodograph.

These options are available when

using a wide-screen monitor.

The dual-column data display

options appear when the “Columns”
command box is selected (as seen
on the left).

Column #1 data are listed in the

upper-right section of the sounding
diagram, while the Column #2 data
are listed to the right side of the
sounding diagram.

Note that when the Hodograph is

plotted to the right side of the
sounding diagram, the Column #2
data list is automatically shifted
below the Hodograph image.

See the next page for information on how to place the Hodograph image to the right-side of the sounding.
74

5.6 TAB 6 – Hodograph.

Plot Hodograph. Plots a mini-

hodograph on the sounding
diagram screen. Options exist for
plot location, scaling, and storm
motion; and are discussed in the
Hodogram Options configuration
section.

See the DISPLAYS section for

further description of the unique
Hodogram, which is a separate 3-
dimensional representation of the
sounding’s vertical wind structure.

Plot Storm-Motion vector. Select

this option to plot the estimated
storm-motion vector.

Plot Mean-Wind storm-layer vector.

Select this option to plot the mean
wind in an olive color.

Plot Location. Choose the Upper-Left or Upper-Right corner of the sounding diagram for any display
monitor. Choose the Right-screen only if using a widescreen monitor. (See prior page for an example.)

Axes Origin. A Centered grid will always keep the x-y axes centered in the Hodograph box. A Data-
Dependent grid focuses on the quadrant with the majority of wind vectors and accordingly offsets the grid
origin. Both options employ auto-scaling.

Axes Scaling. Allows manual selection of maximum axes wind speed. Useful for comparison purposes.

Range. Select the Same as Sounding to display all the winds that are plotted on the parent sounding
diagram. Select Custom range to manually specify the vertical depth of the displayed wind data.

Data Dots. Select Each wind point to plot red dots for each wind level, or Each kilometer for red circles
identifying each kilometer of height along the hodograph line.

Example of a mini-hodograph plotted with the

above configuration options, including the
“thick line” plotting option which is found on
the Sounding Data tab.
75

5.7 TAB 7 – Displays.

Display a title above the sounding diagram. This
option is useful for imaging and printing purposes.
Add UTC Time Offset text appends the LOCAL Day
and Time after the above Sounding "Titlte" line.

Display a METAR report below the sounding. METAR

reports are only produced when the RICAPS (cloud &
precip) mode is selected via the Algorithm Options.

Display a horizontal cursor indicator line. This line is

very useful for graphic referencing.

Display scroller bar below sounding diagram. Provides

another option for viewing multi-sounding files.

ISA Sounding. The International Standard

Atmosphere Sounding (ISA Sounding) is a hypothetical
vertical distribution of the atmosphere. Select the
desired interval of ISA sounding grid overlays.

Logo display. This allows display of a custom logo

image created by the RAOB user.

5.8 TAB 8 – Height Lines. 5.9 TAB 9 – Temperature Lines.

RAOB allows up to three horizontal height RAOB up to six temperature lines on the
lines to be drawn on the sounding diagram. diagram. Each line can be oriented either
Each line can be individually configured to as a temperature (Tmp) coordinate line or a
meet user needs, including printed labels, height (Hgt) coordinate line. These options
colors, line style, location, and height units. are useful for highlighting temperatures or
Example uses are identification of “flight thresholds of interest or to enhance
level” or other significant reference heights. graphics for display purposes.

Use the “Insert special characters” buttons to include characters not directly available on the keyboard.
76

6. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION.

6.1 TAB 1 – Display Preferences.

Default Sounding Diagrams.

Main Screen. The generic, all-purpose sounding display. Useful for most purposes.
Severe Weather. Provides specialized severe weather nomograms and charts.
Winter Weather. Provides specialized winter weather nomograms and charts.
Fire/AQ Weather. Provides Fire Danger / Air-Quality displays of configurable nomograms.
Tropical Weather. Provides tornado, waterspout, and flooding analysis charts and nomograms.
Soundingram. Provides X-Y diagrams of significant atmospheric parameters.
Vertical Cross-Section. Enables displays of distance-base and time-series sounding data.
Custom View. Gives the user complete control of displayed diagrams, text, size and locations.
Doppler. Produces a unique multi-view screen designed for VAD, PPI, RHI and other displays.

Time-series datafile rule (initial access). Select from the "First", "Last", and "List all soundings" options
to determine how time-series datafiles are initially processed. After initial datafile access, RAOB reverts
back to the default "List all soundings" data handling mode.

Diagram Options.

Add Month & Year to sounding title displays using file properties information, versus only Day/Hr.
This option only applies to standard WMO coded sounding data, since this data only has the sounding’s
“day” and “hour” launch date, while “month” and “year” are not specified. By choosing this option, RAOB
will add the month and year as obtained from the data file’s creation date. The file’s creation date must be
accurate in order for this option to produce a correct title display.

Automatically adjust wind plot intervals for easy viewing. This is the default method for displaying high-
density wind plot data. Uncheck this option box to use the manual plot options, using the Wind plot
interval data options, where the user specifies Sounding and/or Cross-Section intervals.
77

Wind Plot Feather Orientation.

Right. Northern hemisphere plotting convention – used for all soundings when checked.
Left. Southern hemisphere plotting convention – used for all soundings when checked.
via Default Hemisphere. RAOB automatically determines feather orientation based on the Latitude value
associated with each sounding or as determined from information obtained from the RAOB.STN station
locator file. If the sounding’s latitude cannot be determined, then the default hemisphere and associated
convention is applied.

Default Hemisphere. Select North or South. Affects wind plot feathering and severe storm steering
algorithms.

Pressure Units. Select millibars (mb) or hectopascals (hPa).

QNH Units. Select millibars (mb) or inches-of-Mercury (in Hg) for the surface altimeter setting. The QNH
will only be displayed when the DIAGRAM's "Draw surface line" configuration option is selected.

+/- Std Height Difference. Select meters or feet for geopotential height difference units between the
sounding and standard atmosphere heights. These values are sometimes called D-values or D-Val.
"D-Value" is an analysis toolbar option for Cross-Section and Time-Height diagrams. It is visible on the
Sounding Listing's "Complete Listing" view, and is an option with the Advanced Export module.

Background Screen Color. Select White or Black.

Diagram Lines. Select the "Thick lines" box to increase line thickness of all program diagram lines.

Default Data Directories.

Sounding Data. Specify the default location of sounding data files.

Display most recently used sounding files. Select this option to display the 5 most
recently used sounding files (displayed under the File Menu option).

Always update with last directory accessed. Select this option to automatically update the default
sounding directory with the last directory used for sounding access and selection.

Cross-Section DataSets. Specify the default location of cross-section dataset files. It is highly
recommended that this “dataset” directory be different than the above “sounding” directory. Note: this
option is only available with the optional Cross-Section Modules.

Display most recently used cross-section files. Select this option to display the 5 most
recently used cross-section files (displayed under the File Menu option).

Doppler Data. Specify the default location of Doppler derived data files.
78

6.2 TAB 2 – Algorithm Options. (This Tab is only available with the optional Analytic Module.)

Turbulence (CAT). CAT = Clear Air Turbulence. Both CAT options are described in the SOUNDING
ANALYSES section of this manual. Note: Turbulence associated with mountain-wave activity is available
with the optional Turbulence & Mountain-Wave program module, which is discussed later in this manual.
The FAA criteria are based on a July 1967 meeting of the Sub-committee/AMS as reflected in the
Weather Service Operations Manual (WSOM) and the Airman’s Information Manual (AIM). The USAF
criteria are based on USAF Air Weather Service studies as reflected in AFGWC/TN-79/001.

The PBL TKE option includes the affects of terrain-induced mechanical turbulence within the boundary
layer (PBL); where TKE represents Turbulent Kinetic Energy. Surface "Roughness" is a user option,
which ranges from 2.0 for large buildings & forests to 0.0002 for smooth/calm open water.

Icing (structural). All three options are described in the SOUNDING ANALYSES section.

• The AFGWC criteria are based on the Air Force Global Weather Central icing algorithms, which only
use temperature, moisture, and lapse rate as predictors (Cornell et al, 95).

• The Smith-Feddes criteria are based on the studies from two USAF Air Weather Service publications,
USAFETAC TN 74-1 (Smith, 74) and TN 74-4 (Feddes, 74). This method is highly dependent on cloud
amount. RAOB allows the user to select the source of cloud information. This is done with the adjacent
“Cloud Analyses” options box to the right (which is explained in detail on the next page).

• The USAF criteria are based on USAF Air Weather Service studies as reflected in AWS/TR-80/001.
When selected, the Icing Threshold % option is displayed. Use this option to define the relative humidity
(RH) threshold at which icing is detected. Suggest initially using the 85% default value, until the actual RH
associated with confirmed icing can be determined. Note: a 85% threshold will usually over-forecast icing,
but this is only for identifying "potential" icing layers. This threshold should be adjusted for local
conditions. A 100% threshold is not necessary for icing, since icing is produced by super-cooled water
droplets in cloud layers.
79

Cloud Analyses.

RICAPS Method. RICAPS (RAOB Integrated Cloud And Precipitation System).

RICAPS requires use of the optional Analytic program module.

RICAPS performs a sophisticated series of bottom-up scans to determine cloud layers. This system is
superior to the older "Traditional" temperature/dewpoint relationship algorithm (see below), which over-
analyzes low clouds and under-analyzes high clouds. The RICAPS cloud algorithm works with any
sounding profile and is completely independent of modeled cloud fields. These cloud algorithms use a
combination of temperature, dewpoint, relative humidity, wet-bulb & frostpoint temperatures and their
associated lapse-rates. In addition to superior cloud analyses, the RICAPS system also determines
precipitation type and intensity.

· Precipitation Type is determined using an advanced top-down scan methodology. It consolidates the
strengths of the commonly used top-down P-Type methods, including the Baldwin, Ramer, and Bourgouin
methods. Most importantly, it also eliminates their weaknesses, such as inability to determine precipitation
rate, the lack of dry-layer detection & feeder-seeder integration, lack of ability to use humidity for
nucleation determination, lack of wet-bulb interrogation at key thresholds, and the assumption that ice
crystals are always present during the top-down initiation process. In addition to eliminating the above
weaknesses, the RICAPS method not only determines the percentage of ice crystals during top-down
initialization, but it also continually updates this percentage while scanning downward at 100-foot intervals.
Special analyses are additionally performed each time the profile crosses the zero-degree isotherm and at
the base of dry-layers. And if a dry-layer is encountered, RICAPS then begins a unique, dual-track, top-
down process, which simulates the effects of feeder-seeder processes. RICAPS can be used with any
sounding profile and is geographically independent since it can be used at any location and any elevation,
unlike the Partial-Thickness (P-Type) nomogram method.

· Precipitation Intensity is determined using both Bottom-Up and Top-Down scans of the entire profile.
The algorithm uses a combination of cloud layers, relative humidity, and associated temperature and
dewpoint lapse-rates.

When the RICAPS algorithms are activated, you can also configure RAOB to produce a complete METAR
report at the base of Sounding diagrams. See the Diagram Options’ “Display” Tab for this option.

When RAOB’s “Winter Weather” sounding diagram display option is used, a

unique Precipitation Donut nomogram is displayed (see sample image at left).
The Precipitation Donut is an interactively graphic representation of
precipitation type and intensity. The precipitation type and intensity (such as -
SNRA) can even be displayed in the Custom Data Listing as the "PrecipType"
data item.

Traditional Method. This method uses the very simple Temperature – Dewpoint spread relationship,
which is explained in the Cloud Layer Table section of this User Manual.

CFRL Method. CFRL is cloud coverage data as produced by numerical weather models, such as
available with BUFKIT data. If CFRL data is not available, then RICAPS or Traditional mode data is used.

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Humidity. RAOB uses Relative Humidity (RH) for Icing, Clouds, and many other standard applications.
RAOB also calculates Absolute Humidity, but it is not used for any indices or applications.
80

Storm Motion Prediction.

Traditional Method. This method is widely used as a first guess for predicting storm movement. It
traditionally uses a steering flow depth of 0 to 6 km and a steering motion derived from 30-degrees & 75%
of steering flow wind. RAOB allows the user to individually configure all storm motion variables, including
flow depth (top and bottom limits), angular deviation, and storm speed percentage.

This simple steering method was statistically derived and has shown to be reliable in most cases.
Normally, storm motion moves to the right of mean wind in the northern hemisphere and to the left in the
southern hemisphere. Additionally, RAOB calculates the mean wind using the popular and preferred
thickness-weighted method.

Bunkers Method. An “internal dynamics” method of predicting supercell motion that is physically-based
and shear-relative. It has been shown to be statistically superior to other simple statistical methods,
especially in higher wind regimes. The standard Bunkers method can become less reliable with lower-
speed winds, but this has been addressed with the new “Universal Mean Wind” option, which is shown
below. For further discussion of the Bunkers methodology, please see the “Storm Motion Prediction”
paragraphs of the SOUNDING ANALYSES section. (See "Reference" section for 3 source publications.)

Saturation Vapor Pressure Calculations.

w.r.t. Water only. The “with-respect-to (w.r.t.) Water only” option will replicate Saturation Adiabat and
Saturation Mixing Ratio diagram reference lines as commonly seen on standard sounding plotting charts.
All calculations are derived on a Clausius-Clapeyron based equation for vapor pressures over water only.

w.r.t. Water & Ice. This option employs two different equations – one for “w.r.t water only” (as discussed
above) and one for “w.r.t. ice only.” The author has been unable to locate a single equation, which
accurately calculates vapor pressures over both surfaces. Consequently, use of this option results in a
very small discontinuity of Saturation Adiabat (and to a lesser extent, Saturation Mixing Ratio) lines as
seen on the diagram at the zero degree temperature line.

Equations for both algorithms discussed above were taken from the International Meteorological Tables.

Relative Humidity with respect to Ice algorithms (RHi). There are 2 options ...

International Meteorological Table polynomial using Td & T profile data. This RHi method uses
conventional Vapor Pressure (of Td) over water divided by conventional Saturation Vapor
Pressure (of T) over ice.

Saturation Vapor Pres over ice polynomial frost point (Tf) and T profile data. This RHi method
uses Saturation Vapor Pressures over ice for both the derived Frostpoint temperature (Tf) divided
by the Dry Bulb (T) temperature.

Effective Storm-Relative Helicity (ESRH) calculations. When selected, RAOB determines the depth of
the helicity layer as a function of the CAPE layer. Resulting ESRH calculations take much more
processing time and will significantly slow down looping & multi-sounding operations. When activated, the
ESRH data is automatically applied to the STP (Significant Tornado Parameter), VTP (Violent Tornado
Parameter), and SCP (Supercell Composite Parameter) indices.
81

EHI Depth. EHI or Energy Helicity Index combines shear and instability into one parameter. It is a
function of s-rH and positive CAPE (B+). The inflow layer depth can be specified by the user, although
the 0-1 km or 0-2 km depths are most common. Recent studies indicate that that the lowest 1km shear
has the greatest influence on determining whether supercells will produce tornadoes or not.

Wind Shear Layer. This option exists to allow the user to define the standard depth for wind shear
calculations used throughout the program. (The standard layer is 6 km.) Note that the sounding's "shear"
vector can be optionally displayed on the sounding diagram as part of the data analyses listing.

VGP Depth. VGP or Vorticity Generation Parameter is the rate at which horizontal vorticity is converted to
vertical vorticity through tilting. Like the EHI Depth option, the user specifies the desired depth. Details of
this parameter can be found in the SOUNDING ANALYSES chapter.

Desert (high plains) mode. This option is appropriate for soundings that have a Station Elevation of
1,500 meters (or 5,000 feet) or higher. The Desert mode option affects the Showalter Index, the
European S-Index, and the Total-Totals / Cross-Totals / Vertical-Totals values. When selected, the 850
mb temperature and dewpoint are replaced by the 700 mb values, and the 500 mb temperature is
replaced by the 400 mb temperature.

Cloud Water (LWC). There are 2 methods which measure the Cloud Water, or LWC (Liquid Water
Content), in clouds ...

Enthalpy equation. This method uses the adiabatic Enthalpy (gamma) lapse-rate equation, where
LWC is a function of density, specific heat at constant pressure, latent heat of vaporization, dry
adiabatic lapse rate, and the moist adiabatic lapse rate. (Reference: Gultepe, ICCP, 2008.)

Mixing-ratio method. This method uses an algorithm consisting of mixing-ratios and density
parameters as defined in AWS/TR-80/001, Forecasters’ Guide on Aircraft Icing.

Inversion Thresholds. Control the minimum thickness and lapse-rate for inversion detection.

Ducting. Refractivity Trapping Threshold is a user option. RAOB calculates atmospheric refractivity (N &
K-units) and detects steep N-unit gradients used to locate "trapping" layers and subsequent propagation
ducting potential. A "trapping" layer is identified when the N gradient is greater than a defined threshold,
which is typically 157 N/km (the commonly accepted default value).

Mixing Height (PBL) method. There are 4 methods which estimate the Mixing Height, or Planetary
Boundary Level (PBL) ...

Holzworth method. Holzworth is the standard "theta" method which lifts the surface parcel dry
adiabatically until it intersects the sounding profile. If no intersection is found, the height is located
at the top of surface inversion, or else at the bottom of 1st elevated inversion.

Stull method. The Stull method uses "virtual theta" data and lifts parcels with the sounding's
virtual temperature profile.

Heffter method. The Heffter method finds the lowest critical inversion which meets Theta gradient
and lapse-rate criteria as specified by Heffter (1980).

Q method. The Q method finds the minimum vertical gradient of Specific Humidity (q).

Note: One or all 4 PBL methods can be selected. If more than one is selected, then all those
selected will be averaged into a single PBL value for display and/or export purposes.
82

6.3 TAB 3 – Parcel Lifting & CAPE.

Lifted Parcel Level (LPL).

Surface . This is the most direct and common form of parcel lifting. It calculates SBCAPE.

Most Unstable. This is the MUCAPE option, which finds the “Best Level” parcel. It uses the parcel level
with the highest CAPE within the lowest, user-identified search layer.

MUCAPE Search Layer (mb). Enter the lower depth (mb/hPa) range for finding the most unstable
parcel. The recommended default depth is 300 mb.

MUCAPE Parcel Identification Method.

Highest wet-bulb potential temperature. The default and fastest method.

Calculate CAPE evey 1 mb and select the parcel having the highest CAPE value.
This option is very time-consuming, but most accurate.

Mean Layer. This parcel is calculated from a thickness-weighted average of all temperatures (and dew
points) within the lowest xxx mb layer (see below). It calculates MLCAPE.

Mean Lower Layer (mb). This "mean layer" is used to define the depth of the Lower_x_mb_layer
of the LPL. This value is also used to determine the mean mixing ratio and find the CCL.

Multiple prompt. This feature is only available with the optional Interactive Module. This capability is
activated by using the “Lift Parcel” button on the Sounding's Analyses Toolbar. When activated, the user
is presented with a “RAOB Lifting Options” box containing three lifting methods. (1) Lift Parcels. The
user can lift any data level and overlay up to 9 lifting sequences. (2) Lift Layer. The user can specify any
layer to be moved up or down within the sounding. This option can help simulate convective events such
as found within thunderstorm cells. (3) Lift Sounding. The user can adjust (up or down) the entire
sounding (including winds) by a prescribed pressure amount. It can simulate mountain/valley changes.
83

CAPE (Convective Available Potential Energy) Base Level.

nd rd
LFC. Standard option. This option must be used in order to use the 2 & 3 options of CAPE Depth (see
below), since they are LFC-based.

CCL. This option can only be used if the surface parcel is lifted. When CAPE is calculated using the CCL
as the base, the lifted parcel's free air temperature is identified by the Convective Temperature (Tc).

Temperature Base.

The Dry Bulb option is standard for most analyses and can be used with either the LFC or CCL base level.

The Virtual Temperature selection is often used to simulate the maximum thermodynamic potential of the
atmosphere as represented by the plotted sounding. In a moist atmosphere, the virtual temperature is
always greater than the actual temperature, taking into account the moisture’s energy potential. It affects
the values of the LFC and CAPE-related parameters. When the Virtual temperature base is selected and
the Classic Data Display is used, affected data displays will be followed by a purple [>] character instead
of the standard white [:] symbol. This option can only be used with the LFC base level option.

CAPE Depth.

Total. This is the standard method of CAPE calculation and display. All positive (B+) energy is
represented by CAPE and all negative (B-) energy is represented by CIN (or Convective Inhibition). When
displayed on the sounding, CAPE is colored RED and CIN is colored BLUE.

0-x km above LFC. This option will only calculate CAPE (B+) from the LFC to x km above the LFC. This
region has been found useful in differentiating between tornadic and non-tornadic supercells. The most
common region studied is the 0-3km depth. When displayed on the sounding, this region is colored RED.

Both. This option will calculate and display “Total” and “0-x km” CAPE. When displayed on the sounding,
the “0-x km” CAPE is colored Dark RED, while the remaining CAPE is colored Light RED.

DCAPE (Downdraft CAPE). Choose from the more time-consuming density weighted averaged method,
the default average wetbulb method, or the fastest coldest wetbulb temperature method. When a
multiple-sounding datafile is sequentially looped, RAOB automatically uses the fastest method, but the
program then reverts back to the ‘configured’ option when stopped for data viewing purposes. DCAPE
depth is user-configurable, but the common standard is 6 km.

Color DCAPE & DCIN regions with CAPE & CIN. This option is only available with the "Coldest wet-
bulb temperature" DCAPE option. DCAPE is colored Dark PURPLE and DCIN is colored Light PURPLE.

Maximum Parcel Level (MPL). Toggles on/off the MPL displays of text (which appears on the sounding
diagram after activating the Significant Levels Analyses option) and graphics (which appears on the
sounding diagram after activating the CAPE Analyses option). See the next page for an example.

Hail Region. Select this option to analyze the CAPE area that exists within the -10ºC and -30ºC
temperature zone. This zone is shaded a medium blue color and represents the most favorable hail
growth region, especially for large hail (as per NOAA/NWS Advanced Warning Operations Course, 2004).
This parameter is listed as “CAPE..Hail” on the sounding’s data listing. Studies show that steep lapse
rates in a sounding’s hail growth zone are favorable for large hail. The thicker the CAPE..Hail graphic
area, the greater the probability for large hail. See next page for example image.

Sea Surface Temperature . Used as an input parameter for the Waterspout-2 (Szilagyi) index.

Always use "Local Mountain" parameters when no WMO number is available. This is used for the Froude
Number calculations. Mountain parameters are stored (and edited) in the RAOB.MTN resource file.
84

The below diagram shows how RAOB displays the various types of CAPE regions.

Overshoot Cape (light blue). This region is always above the Equilibrium Level (EL). This Cape
region is only displayed when the MPL (Maximum Parcel Level) option is selected from the
Program Configuration Options menu (see prior page). When displayed, the trace of the lifted
parcel will continue past the EL until the positive (B+) and negative (B-) CAPE energies cancel
each other. This represents the maximum potential height of convective cloud tops. In the above
example, the overshooting CAPE area stops at the 100 mb level only because the sounding plot
does not continue any higher.

Cape+ (light red). This region is the predominant positive CAPE (also called B+).
O
Cape..Hail (medium blue). This region depicts the primary hail growth zone (-10 to -30 C).

Cape 0-3km (dark red). This is a special interest region and is also part of the Cape+ area.

CIN (dark blue). This region represents Convective Inhibition (also called B-).

DCAPE (dark purple). This is the Downdraft CAPE region.

DCIN (light purple). Not shown, because region does not exist with this sounding.
85

6.4 TAB 4 – System Configuration.

Configuration Files.

RAOB creates separate configuration files for each user. Control whether multiple users use the same or
different program configurations. Uncheck this option to force all users to access the same program
configuration settings.

Manually identify where RAOB configuration files are managed. Specify the location of all RAOB
“Configuration files” and “Working files”.

System Configuration. Currently allows up to eight (8) system-wide configurations.

The Default option identifies which configuration is used upon initial RAOB activation.
The Current option identifies which configuration is currently in use.

The configuration Title is displayed in the lower-left portion of the screen display, unless the “Display”
checkbox (located below these options) is not checked. The configuration Description is only used to
further describe the configuration title and is not displayed anywhere else in the program.

Export Mode. The Export Mode selection determines which method automatically appears when the
Export Sounding Data menu is selected. The Advanced mode permits selective exporting of nearly all
parameters which RAOB produces. It was added with the RAOB 6.3 version and will continue to be
updated with newer versions. The Standard (or Classic) mode consists of exporting functions available
with RAOB 6.2 and older versions. This mode is only made available for those who wish to continue with
this export method. Both exporting methods are discussed earlier in the File Menu section.
86

6.5 TAB 5 – Dates & Fonts.

Date/Time format. Select the desired DTG format for sounding title displays and export functions.

UTC (Zulu) Time Offset. UTC = Coordinated Universal Time; also known as Zulu (or Z) time. The
Offset value is needed to determine LOCAL Time, for uses such as Fog prediction. Use positive values in
the Eastern Hemisphere and negative values in the Western Hemisphere.

Program Font Adjustments. Some PC displays require font size adjustments. This option is global in
nature. Select either Huge, Large (the default option), Medium, Small, or Tiny fonts. For additional fine
tuning of displayed fonts, check the "Enable fine font adjustments" options box and then enter smaller or
larger font ratios as desired. These adjustments will not affect printed output.

Printer Font Adjustments. These options allow users to increase font sizes for printer purposes. This
is especially useful for certain print media and presentation purposes. These options only affect the
Sounding and/or Hodograph diagrams as indicated. Point values between 0 and 3 can be entered.
87

6.6 TAB 6 – Data Processing.

NOAA GSD Data. Automatically adjust surface data (first data level) to match station elevation. Some
GSD sounding data do not contain values that correspond to the station’s elevation. When checked,
RAOB enforces this correlation. This option does not apply to GSD formatted ACARS data.

Radiometrics (RDX) Data.

Elevation value for older RDX soundings with no GPS elevation data. Use as needed.
Override RDX elevation for files containing GPS elevation data. Required for some processing cases.
Pre-select a scan mode for RDX files containing multiple scan modes. This option is useful during
automation processing where user selection is not needed or desired for each datafile. If the datafile only
contains one Scan Mode, then that mode will be selected regardless of which mode is defined in the data
entry box. If the preselected Scan Mode does not exist in the RDX datafile, then a Scan Mode prompt
screen will display a list of available Scan Modes.

Meisei Data.

Enter elevation value for soundings with no elevation header data - use as needed.
Extrapolate surface data if surface values do not exist. Creates pressure, temperature, and wind data.

Sodar / Lidar / Radar Temperature & Wind Data.

If surface temperature is missing, isothermally extrapolate surface data. The corresponding surface
st
temperature will be the same as the 1 (lowest elevation) temperature found on the sounding profile.

If the surface wind is missing... Then RAOB adds a surface wind level. The surface wind speed is
reduced by the user defined percentage (%) of the lowest wind found. The wind direction remains the
same. If the wind profile contains a vertical wind component (W), then that value is set to zero (0).

Interpolate wind data for levels missing values. This will interpolate wind data for those data levels where
wind data is missing. This currently only functions for DeTect radar wind profiles.
88

7. Weather Alert Editor. (Available with the optional Analytic Module.)

The below Weather Alert Editor example shows all currently available alert options. The user can specify
a minimum threshold value for each alert. In some cases, such as for LLWS and Fog, a specific layer can
also be specified. LLWS is being edited in the below example image. More options are planned.
89

Below is an example Skew-T sounding with the weather alert pop-up display. From all the alert options
selected on the opposite page, only two alerts reached threshold values for this example sounding. When
the pop-up display is presented, the user can also select sound notification options for audio alerts (as
seen below). If a sound option is selected, the sound will continue (if "continuous" is selected) until the
user clicks on the pop-up display. The user can also click the “Skip” button to silence alerts for the
remainder of the current RAOB session, or enter the Alert Editor to re-activate the alert mode.

If the optional Real-Time Display module option is used (along with the optional Advanced Cross-Section
module), the weather alert feature also becomes available. Below is an example of an alert pop-up as
displayed on a Time-Height diagram, where the last (right-most) sounding has met threshold criteria for
the displayed alert. Alert sound options are also available similar to the sounding diagram alerts.
90

8. Severe Weather Parameter Table. (Available with the optional Analytic Module.)

This table provides a

quick look at a
sounding’s key
meteorological,
severe weather
parameters and
indices, which can be
configured for local
conditions. Each
parameter has two
configuration options:
Threshold Definition
and a Weighting
Factor.

Displayed and printed

parameters can be
color-coded as
defined by the user.
The “Print using…”
checkboxes can be
used to activate color
coding of parameter
data. Use the “Color”
buttons to define
colors and the “Reset”
buttons to restore the
original default colors.

Threshold Definition. Severe weather tables are typically designed to list each parameter with respect to 3
categories (weak, moderate, strong) as defined by threshold values. RAOB allows the user to specify
these threshold values for each parameter. This is accomplished by defining the lower and upper data
thresholds for the “Moderate” category, where data values less than the lower threshold will result in a
Weak category and data greater than the upper threshold will result in a Strong category. The RAOB
program is distributed with default threshold values, which are typically valid for either the central U.S. or
for the specific geographical region where the parameter was developed. Through this configuration
menu option, parameter thresholds can be modified to better reflect data ranges that are significant to the
user’s local area of interest. The default threshold values can be restored at any time using the “Restore”
button at the bottom of the display page.
91

Weighting Factors. RAOB also allows the user to assign weighting factors for each parameter. Assigned
weights can range from 0 to 10. Default weights are set at 1 for all parameters. This weighting option is
especially useful for selectively eliminating table parameters of little or no significance to a local area of
interest. This is accomplished by assigning a weighting factor of 0 (zero). Once a weight of 0 is assigned,
that parameter will not be listed on the output table. Weighting factors greater than 1 will cause RAOB to
increase the parameter’s relative significance with respect to the other parameters. For example, if all
parameters were equally weighted with ones (1), and only 5 parameters had data values in the Strong
category, then the total count for the Strong category would be 5. However, if the first parameter had a
weight of 2 and the second had a weight of 3, then the total count for the Strong category would be 8 or (2
+ 3 + 1 + 1 + 1 = 8). Weighting factors higher than a value of 1 should normally be used for parameters
statistically proven to be relatively more significant than the other parameters.

Below is an example of the resulting application of how the Severe Weather Parameters are processed
for display. The example display is presented for viewing by selecting the “Listings” menu option (or by
pressing the keyboard’s SpaceBar). The Listings display (explained in greater detail earlier in this manual)
example below presents the “Severe Weather” tab, which shows the Severe Weather Parameter results.
For each parameter, the Weight, Parameter Name, and Threshold value (for Weak, Moderate, or Strong)
is displayed. Each threshold column is totaled at the bottom of the display.
92

9. Fog Index Table. (Available with the optional Analytic Module.)

The Fog Index & Predictor Configuration Table provides an easy method to configure a sounding's key
parameters and indices which help predict fog occurrence. RAOB uses this table's configuration settings
to produce the Fog~Radiat & Fog~Advect parameters as fog predictors for Radiation and Advection fogs,
respectively. These 2 parameters can be displayed on the Sounding diagram as seen below. By using the
Custom Data Displays listing option (also seen below), both fog types can be plotted on the Cross-
Section, Time-Section, or Custom View meteograms. The RAOB fog table permits individual
configuration options for Radiation and Advection fogs. Each fog predictor has 2 configuration options: a
Weighting Factor and Probability Ranges, which are explained in detail on the next 2 pages.

Example “Fire & Air-Quality” screen display showing graphic and text Fog displays.
93

Fog Index & Predictor Configuration Table (the Standard Predictors)

Weighting Factors. Each predictor can be assigned a weight from zero to ten (0 - 10). The default value
is one, but non-global predictors are initially set to zero, where a zero value eliminates the parameter from
table summaries. Values greater than one add more relative weight to predictors that are more significant.

Probability Ranges. Fog probability ranges are defined with respect to 3 levels of significance: Low, Mid,
and High. RAOB allows the user to define the lower & upper limits of the "Mid" probability range, thereby
permitting automatic definition of the remaining "Low" and "High" probability ranges. The default values
are typically valid for the eastern U.S. region, but all values should be modified to reflect local conditions.

The "Cloud Cover" predictor is unique because it only uses 4 categories for cloud cover (0=clear, 1=few,
2=scattered, 3=broken, and 4=overcast). These values are automatically determined from RAOB's
internal cloud algorithms (unless manually entered via the Cloud Layer Table).

It is important that the sequence of the Mid (left & right) probability values be correct. For example,
increasing numbers indicate that the parameter potential increases with bigger values (like RH%),
whereas decreasing numbers indicate that the parameter potential increases with smaller values (like T-
Td). Note that the "Total Precipitable Water" (TPW) predictor uses opposite trends, because larger TPW
values favor advection fogs while smaller TPW values favor radiation fogs.

For parameters that have double-sided limits (such as the "Surface Wind Speed"), two additional
probability values are needed to accurately define probability boundary values. In these cases, the first two
and the last two values define the "mid" ranges, while the middle two values define the "high" range.
94

The Special Predictors. The "Special Predictors" are initially set to a weight of zero, because they are
most sensitive to local conditions and can not be easily configured to reflect global conditions. These
"Special" predictors must be individually configured to reflect local conditions.

The below Fog Table example shows how all data can be displayed as text with the Listing Menu option.
95

10. Cloud Layer Table. (Available with the optional Analytic Module.)

Cloud layer and precipitation data are

required for the Smith-Feddes (but not
the USAF or the AFGWC) icing
methodologies. Cloud data are always
automatically generated by RAOB for all
newly displayed soundings, unless the
user specifies cloud layers through this
manual input form.

For optimum accuracy with icing and

lightning analyses, manual input of
known cloud layers is essential.

Clouds. Toggle this button to display

typical cloud layer heights, which are
useful when manually entering cloud
layer data.

Cloud Determination Method.

Manual. The above image shows the “Manual” method, where the user can “Add” and “Remove” layers
as needed. This method is highly recommended for those needing to precisely study cloud layers and
associated icing conditions and other related atmospheric parameters. This method is normally used
when cloud layer data is available form other independent sources.

Automatic. During automatic cloud generation, RAOB only determines basic cloud types from the
sounding's data profile. RAOB uses 2 methods of determining cloud coverage: Traditional and RICAPS...

1. Traditional Method. This is done using this simple temperature-dewpoint spread algorithm.

Few: if T/Td spread <= 5 °C

Scattered: if T/Td spread <= 3 °C Stratiform if lapse rate is <= 1.8 °C/1000 feet,
Broken: if T/Td spread <= 1.6 °C or else the cloud is Cumuliform.
Overcast: if T/Td spread <= 0.6 °C

2. RICAPS Method. The RICAPS method is superior to the Traditional method since it uses a
sophisticated series of bottom-up scanning processes to identify cloud layers. RICAPS is activated from
the Program Options configuration panel’s “Algorithm Options” Tab as seen below.
96

11. DATA DECODERS.

All data (except BUFR, GRIB, and netCDF) must be in the standard ASCII (or human readable) format.
RAOB can read data files containing single or multiple soundings per file (depending on the data type). If
a data file contains multiple soundings, then a sorted list of available soundings is presented from which
the user can easily select the desired sounding for processing. RAOB can automatically read and decode
rawinsonde data from just about any source and format. Since there are always new sounding formats
being generated worldwide, please let ERS know of any new or changed formats, as we will do our best to
accommodate these changes as quickly as possible. In some cases, new decoders can be developed
and be made ready for download within 24 hours.

11.1 Basic Module Decoders. The following 6 data decoders are available to the RAOB Basic module.

11.1.1 CSV Data. This format is unique to the RAOB program. This is a very popular format that
allows users a great variety of data input options. It is a spreadsheet style (comma-separated value)
format that currently allows up to 30,000 data levels per sounding and allows any combination of
temperature, wind, and ozone data. This format also accepts vertical wind component (W) data,
BUFKIT’s Omega & CFRL data, Radiometric’s Vapor Density & Liquid Water data, and other user-defined
data elements. An example of the CSV format is listed at the end of this manual. The CSV format has an
optional WMO identifier field. If this field is used and if the same WMO number is listed in the RAOB.STN
locator file, then the other optional fields (latitude, longitude, and elevation) are not necessary since this
data will be automatically pulled from the station locator file. Likewise, if the same WMO number is listed
in the RAOB.MTN parameter file (and if the optional Mountain-Wave Module is used), then associated
mountain parameters will be automatically used for all mountain-wave analyses.

11.1.2 Raw Data. The Raw data format is RAOB’s indigenous format. All data accessed for
processing by RAOB are first converted to this Raw format for all internal processing purposes. Raw data
are organized into two data groups, the Pressure/Temperature and Height/Wind groups. The raw data
format is the simplest and easiest to work with. Raw data allow greater definition and accuracy of
sounding data. For example, raw data often contain pressures that are reported to the tenth of a millibar,
all temperature and dew points are both reported to tenths of a degree, and all wind directions are
reported to the nearest degree. Users will find it much easier to edit a sounding after it is converted to the
Raw format. Once in the Raw format, it becomes very easy to insert or remove data levels. For a detailed
description of the Raw data format, please see the RAW DATA FORMAT Section. Note that NCDC refers
to this Raw data as 'edited' data, since it undergoes quality control processing and editing before
archiving; but RAOB always refers to this form of data as 'raw' data. Note that each raw data file can only
contain one sounding.

11.1.3 WMO Coded Data. RAOB can decode all standard code groups. Each group should end
with either the equal sign (=) or semicolon (;) character. Most commercially available WMO coded data
can be decoded and processed by RAOB. See the DATA SOURCES Section for a partial list of data
sources. RAOB also decodes SHIP and LAND MOBILE (often coded as MOBIL) data and displays site
location (lat & long) in the header information line. RAOB can also decode WMO coded Dropsonde data.
Below are listed the standard WMO data types ...

Surface to 100 mb TTAA – Combined temperature & wind data

TTBB – Temperature data only (including 21212 & 51515 wind data)
PPAA – Wind data with respect to standard pressure levels
PPBB – Wind data only

Above 100 mb TTCC – similar to the TTAA data format

TTDD – similar to the TTBB data format
PPCC – similar to the PPAA data format
PPDD – similar to the PPBB data format

RAOB also processes - SHIP (UUAA...)

- LAND-MOBILE (IIAA...)
- DROP-SONDE (XXAA... hurricane eye data)
97

• TTAA -- contains lower atmosphere (below 100 mb) mandatory level data that normally arrives
within an hour after observation. These data give height, temperature, dewpoint, wind directions
and speed data for set pressure levels: surface, 1000, 925, 850, 700, 500, 400, 300, 250, 200,
150 and 100 millibars plus tropopause and maximum wind level data.

• TTCC -- contains upper atmosphere (above 100 mb) mandatory level data which arrives shortly
after the TTAA data. These data give height, temperature, dewpoint, wind directions and speed
data for set pressure levels: 70, 50, 30, 20 and 10 millibars

• TTBB -- contains lower atmosphere significant level data. Significant level data contain
temperature and dewpoint information at pressure levels other than the mandatory levels where
significant changes in the temperature and dewpoint profiles occur.

• TTDD -- contains upper atmosphere significant level data. Significant level data contain
temperature and dewpoint information at pressure levels other than the mandatory levels where
significant changes in the temperature and dewpoint profiles occur.

• PPAA -- contains lower atmosphere mandatory level wind information. This information is
included in the TTAA data but some stations only report wind data and thus the PPAA is more
appropriate.

• PPCC -- contains upper atmosphere mandatory level wind information. This information is
included in the TTCC reports, but like the PPAA data, it is for stations that only report winds.

• PPBB -- contains lower atmosphere (below 50,000 feet) significant wind data with respect to
heights. These data only contain wind direction and speed information at heights in between
mandatory levels reported at even multiples of 1000 feet.

• PPDD -- contains upper atmosphere (above 50,000 feet) significant wind data with respect to
heights. These data only contain wind direction and speed information at heights in between
mandatory levels reported at even multiples of 1000 feet.

11.1.4 SHARP Modified Data. RAOB will read and process data files created by the popular
SHARP (Skew-T and Hodograph) program. RAOB locates the ICAO identifier from the SHARP data file
for correlation with the RAOB.STN locator file, from which the station name and latitude/longitude
information are retrieved. However, since the Modified SHARP file also contains the station elevation,
RAOB uses this value instead of the value in the RAOB.STN file. If necessary, the user can manually
modify this value using RAOB's data edit (F3 or F4) capabilities. NSHARP and NSHARP2 data can also
be processed by RAOB.

11.1.5 BUFKIT Data. BUFKIT data files contain hourly sequential sounding data for selected
stations, which can be looped for visual analyses purposes. RAOB also processes BUFKIT’s Omega
(vertical motion) data and the CFRL (cloud coverage) data – of which both can be accommodated in
RAOB’s CSV data format. Note: BUFKIT is a forecast profile visualization program developed by NWS
staff from Buffalo, NY and Norman, OK. RAOB can process NAM, NAMM, GFS3, and RUC data formats.
RAOB also processes BUFKIT’s SREF Member data.

11.1.6 University of Wyoming Data (UWYO). Due to its popularity, RAOB contains a special
decoder for these unique datasets. UWYO data files can contain multiple soundings, which RAOB can
process.

NOTE: The RAOB Lite program only contains the WMO and BUFKIT data decoders.
98

11.2 Special Decoders Module. The following data decoders are available with this optional module.

ACARS/AMDAR. Aircraft Communication Addressing and Reporting.

ACTA. Contains multi-sounding, time-series data of standard vertical resolution.
BOM. This data is produced by Australia’s Bureau of Meteorology.
Canadian. Forecast soundings in the "ObsTephi" format.
Catalonia. Files contain high-density, single profile sounding data.
CLIMAT TEMP and Surface Layer CLIMAT monthly profiles.
CLASS/NCAR. Data apparently has very little quality control before its dissemination.
ENSCI. High-density Ozonesonde data; produced by the ENSCI Corporation.
FSL/NCDC. Forecast Systems Laboratory (FSL) at Boulder, Colorado.
German. Singe sounding files produced by the German weather service.
GRAW. Produced by GRAW, each file contains a single, high-density sounding.
GSD. Produced by FSL, Global Systems Division (GSD) data.
GTS1. Chinese radiosonde data.
HiDensity. A unique, columnar data format containing one high-density sounding.
IGRA. Integrated Global Radiosonde Archive (IGRA) data is produced by NCDC.
InterMet (IMET). Produced by the International Met Systems company.
KMA. Korea Meteorological Administration (KMA) data from the South Korean weather services.
Komoline / KEPL. From the Komoline Electronics Private Limited (KEPL) company in India.
Lockheed Martin. This data contains either temperature (PTU) data or wind (Dir & Spd) data.
MAPS. Mesoscale Analysis and Prediction System (MAPS) from NOAA’s FSL offices.
Meisei. From the Meisei Electric Company: RS-06, SNJ, CSV formats.
Meteociel Data. French model forecast sounding format.
Meteomodem. French radiosonde (M10) data.
TM
MeteoSwiss .
NCAR / 4DWX. From NCAR’s Four-Dimensional Weather (4DWX) System.
NCDC CARDS/GTS. From the National Climatic Data Center (NCDC) at Asheville, NC.
NCDC UA. This data contains the sounding’s original WMO coded (TTAA, TTBB, etc) data.
NOAA / FSL Forecast Soundings.
NOAA / READY Forecast and non-forecast Data.
NUCAPS. NWS/AWIPS-derived satellite soundings.
Ogimet. Repackaged global WMO-format global sounding files.
PAOS. Program in Atmospheric and Oceanic Sciences, from the Univ of Colorado at Boulder.
Pisharoty Data. Indian sonde format.
PTU Data. PTU (or Pressure, Temperature, Humidity) data.
RUC. Rapid Update Cycle (RUC) from NOAA’s FSL offices.
SH4/NASA Space Shuttle Data. Primarily used by the NASA community.
Sippican RTSO The Sippican Real-Time Serial Output (RTSO) data.
SkyProbe. A launch-your-own sounder kit from Affordable Research Technologies.
SkySonde. High-density, NOAA/GMD soundings which contain ozone data.
Tephis. Produced by the Canadian GEM regional model (15 km resolution).
TLP. From the National German Weather Service.
TwisterData.com. Tabular sounding data available only via the Internet.
Vaisala. Formats: EDT GAUS, HiRes, UMQ, EOL, RS92, RS41, and many others.
TM
Weather Network .
TM
WSI .
Wxcaster.com: Worldwide model forecast soundings.
99

11.3 Binary (BUFR / GRIB / netCDF) Decoders module. This is an optional decoder module.

BUFR. RAOB can process the special WMO code form FM 94 BUFR (Binary Universal Form for the
Representation of meteorological data) containing various forms of binary meteorological data including
sounding data. This decoder only processes the sounding data formats. This includes the unique formats
produced by the United States’ NWS and the NWS RUC NCEP forecast soundings. All BUFR data are
automatically converted to RAOB’s CSV format for display purposes. Currently, only the most common
sounding data types are decoded, but if a customer encounters a BUFR sounding datafile that does not
process, please notify ERS for resolution.

GRIB. GRIdded Binary (GRIB) data are defined by WMO FM-92 documents. RAOB can process GRIB
rd
Version 1 and 2 data, however, if Version 2 data use the 3 party JPEG2000 data compression
constructs, then RAOB can not process this data, because the JPEG2000 system uses an extremely
expensive propriety data processing system. Similar to the BUFR decoded data, the decoded GRIB data
are also automatically converted to RAOB’s CSV format for display purposes. Currently, only the most
common gridded / regional data fields are decoded, but if a customer encounters a GRIB sounding
datafile that does not process, please notify ERS for resolution.

Below is a typical GRIB decoder map selector display, where the each data grid point is represented by a
dot and available forecast fields are listed in the DTG fields display. Use the “Select” and “Zoom” menu
options to change the mouse pointer functions. The “Reselect” button allows selection of prior locations.
Use the three “map” buttons under the field map to quickly switch between desired geographic regions.
The "Transect" and "Time-Series" menu options are discussed on the next page.
100

GRIB Decoder - Coninued...

The "Transect" menu option allows the user to draw a line across the grid map to automatically create a
Cross-Section diagram, which requires access to the Standard or Advanced Cross-Section module.
101

netCDF. netCDF (network Common Data Form) is another form of binary data that contains data arrays
in grid format, similar to GRIB data. It was developed at the Unidata Program Center in Boulder,
Colorado. The netCDF decoder uses the same user display screen as seen on the prior page showing
the GRIB example. RAOB uses the “ncdump” utility to retrieve sounding data for specific locations. This
utility was also developed by the Unidata personnel. Currently, only the most common data fields are
decoded, but if a customer encounters a netCDF datafile that does not correctly process, please notify
ERS for resolution.

RAOB uses the ncdump.exe utility to extract netCDF data. Since this utility was developed by UCAR, the
following copyright notice and disclaimer is provided below…

Copyright 1993-2007 University Corporation for Atmospheric Research/Unidata

Portions of this software were developed by the Unidata Program at the University Corporation for Atmospheric Research.

Access and use of this software shall impose the following obligations and understandings on the user. The user is granted the
right, without any fee or cost, to use, copy, modify, alter, enhance and distribute this software, and any derivative works thereof, and
its supporting documentation for any purpose whatsoever, provided that this entire notice appears in all copies of the software,
derivative works and supporting documentation. Further, UCAR requests that the user credit UCAR/Unidata in any publications that
result from the use of this software or in any product that includes this software, although this is not an obligation. The names
UCAR and/or Unidata, however, may not be used in any advertising or publicity to endorse or promote any products or commercial
entity unless specific written permission is obtained from UCAR/Unidata. The user also understands that UCAR/Unidata is not
obligated to provide the user with any support, consulting, training or assistance of any kind with regard to the use, operation and
performance of this software nor to provide the user with any updates, revisions, new versions or "bug fixes."

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY UCAR/UNIDATA "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL UCAR/UNIDATA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
ACCESS, USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.

11.4 Sodar/Lidar/Radar Decoder module. This is an optional decoder module.

This module contains decoders for wind data that are derived from Sodar, Lidar, Radar, and various
acoustic sounders – such as RASS. Many of these sensors are capable of measuring winds in three
dimensions, providing U/V/W wind components. SoDAR (or Sonic Detection And Ranging) technologies
are used to obtain wind data, which is typically only obtained in the boundary levels. Lidar (or Light
Detection and Ranging) is a form of laser radar capable of measuring winds in the boundary levels. RASS
(or Radio Acoustic Sounding System) sounding data includes temperature and wind data. The RASS
radar takes advantage of the combination of two technologies, acoustic and electromagnetic, to provide a
real-time temperature profile and deduce from it, with good temporal resolution, the "strength" of the
temperature gradient. The RASS applies a simple principle of physics: the relationship of the speed of
sound and air temperature. RASS soundings are often produced with having either temperature only or
wind data only. These two complimentary soundings can be easily combined into a single sounding using
RAOB’s “Merge” menu option or the AutoMerge function, that are discussed in prior sections of this
manual. This module currently contains decoders for the following manufacturer / formats: AMP, Raptor
(DeTect), Leosphere, Mitsubishi, CASIC, BIRM, Nexrad VWP, RemTech, Scintec, Zephit Lidar, and
NASA DRWP.

11.5 Aerosol Data Decoders module. This is an optional decoder module.

This module contains decoders which can process non-conventional atmospheric parameters, such as
dust, particulate matter, and other parameters of interest. This decoder is unique in that it can process
atmospheric parameters without the need for associated Temperature or Wind data. The only
requirements are a Station Elevation and parameter Heights. RAOB can process up to 3 different
parameters for each profile. If the aerosol data is in a binary format, then the optional Binary Data
Deoders module is required. Additionally, time-height diagrams can be created by using the Cross-
Section module, and soundingrams can be created with the Soundingram module.
102

11.6 Radiometer Decoder module. This is an optional decoder module.

Radiometer sounding data is produced by surface-based microwave profilers. In addition to the standard
temperature and moisture data, these soundings also include liquid-water and vapor-density data. Wind
data are not produced. Soundings can extend to a height of about 10 km and can be produced every few
seconds. The below description covers capabilities of the Standard Radiometer Decoder Module. Note
that the Advanced Radiometer Decoder Module can also process 6 additional scalar parameters: Rain
(yes/no), Quality Flag, Integrated Vapor & Liquid, and Cloud Base Temperature & Heights.

RAOB processes all available Radiometrics

(RDX) data modes, including SCAN(A),
SCAN(N), SCAN(S), ZENITH data, and
many others. When a data file contains
more than one data mode, the user is
presented with the available data options
(see image at left). Only one mode can be
selected for processing at a time.

There is a checkbox option to Always

make this data scan selection each time
a new file is processed, but only while the
current RAOB session is active. The data
scan mode can be changed at any time
while viewing the Data Selector screen
which lists all available soundings within the
datafile.

By using the Configuration Options button

the user can configure RAOB to bypass this
prompt screen and always select a
particular Scan Mode for all future sessions
of RAOB. Clicking this button automatically
displays the Program Configuration options’
“Data Processing” tab as shown below . . .

The below image shows the RDX data processing configuration options, which can be found on the Data
Processing tab of the Program Options menu (or press F9). The Override the RDX elevation option
permits manual override of GPS derived surface elevation values. The Pre-select a scan mode option
permits selection of a specific Scan Mode, thereby bypassing the above Data Scans selection box prompt
as shown in the above image. If the datafile only contains one Scan Mode, then that mode will be
selected regardless of which mode is defined in the below data entry box. If the preselected Scan Mode
does not exist in the RDX datafile, then the above Scan Mode prompt will be displayed.

Once the data mode is selected, and if the datafile does

not contain surface elevation information, the user must
next manually input the elevation of the sounding site.
RAOB will then process the data and plot the sounding.
103

11.7 Doppler Decoder/Display module. This is an optional decoder module.

The Doppler Decoders currently process lidar-based scans from:

- Leosphere WindCube data (PPI, RHI, DBS, and FIXED time-series)
- HALO-Photonics Stream Line data (VAD, RHI, Wind-Profiles, and STARE time-series)

The Doppler screen is unique because it plots 3 different lidar-based images on one display: PPI/VAD,
RHI, and DBS (or vertical wind plots). See example image below. In addition to a complete set of
interactive screen display options, this display also includes a full menu of Batch & Timer options.

The "Map Image" option is located below the PPI display. It allows
inclusion of any geographic map image to help position the scan
data. See example image tot he left.

Map images can be in the BMP, GIF, or JPG format. Images should
be scaled to the maximum range of the PPI / VAD scans. Images
must also be square sized, or RAOB will stretch (or resize) the
image to fit the PPI scan display. When an image is used, the user
will be presented with a slider-bar to enable fading of the scan image
to better see details of the map image.

All doppler based scan data have associated SNR (signal-to-noise

ratio) or CNR (carrier-to-noise ratio) data. The SNR/CNR data can
be used to selectively control which data values are displayed or
ignored.

The SNR/CNR toolbar (seen to the left) is accessed via the Menu
Bar, or simply by right-clicking the mouse over any display image.
The user can then adjust the value to create the desired image
result.
104

12. DeCODED (raw) DATA EDITOR.

Access this data editor through RAOB's

EDIT menu.

All sounding data processed by RAOB

can be viewed and edited using this
DeCoded (or Raw) Data editor.

When RAOB reads data containing a

WMO number, the RAOB.STN data file
is searched for a matching WMO
number. If a match is found, then the
station's ICAO identifier and station
name & location are automatically
placed in the sounding’s Identification &
Information line. Additionally, if a match
is found, both the elevation and
coordinate data are also automatically
attached to the data file for processing.
For stations not listed in the RAOB.STN
file and for all newly entered raw data
soundings, both the elevation and
coordinates must be manually entered
as described next.

12.1 Station Data.

The Original Data Format line identifies the format of sounding data’s source file. To view the source data
and its original format, use the Sounding’s EDIT Menu and then the SOURCE Data Editor.

The Data Identification & Information line is a free form text line available to the user. RAOB will
automatically fill this line with significant information regarding the sounding, which is found from the
source file or from information obtained using a WMO match from the RAOB.STN locator file. This
information line is always initially displayed upon activating the Add and Edit modes. This information line
is always displayed along with the sounding's filename on all screen displays and on all output products.

Station Elevation must be entered in Meters (MSL). Elevations below sea-level are entered using a minus
sign (e.g., -20). If the elevation is not known, RAOB will then estimate the station elevation using the
Pressure-Altitude method. To do this, first remove data from the Meters data box, and then click on the
Estimate Elevation check box. Entry of the sounding site's surface elevation is essential for accurate data
processing by RAOB’s algorithms. Caution: Elevation estimation is only an approximation -- only the
actual measured station elevation will produce accurate results.

Coordinates can be entered in one of two different formats:

Degrees/Minutes/Seconds - or - Decimal-Degrees.

Default Data options exist to help automate entry of new data soundings for the same location. The SAVE
option records the above data, while the APPLY option pastes the saved information onto the Station Data
edit form.
105

12.2 Pressure & Temperature Data.

This form allows entry of pressure-level

data, including temperatures and dewpoints
(or dewpoint spread information). Various
data options give the user maximum
flexibility during data entry.

A missing dewpoint (Td) must be entered

with a small “m”.

New or edited data will only be recorded if

the user presses the ENTER key.

RAOB continually checks data entries for

vertical consistency and against standard
pressure-temperature relationships.

12.3 Height & Wind Data.

This form allows entry of height-level data,

including wind speed & wind direction.
Various data options give the user maximum
flexibility during data entry.

The first wind must be entered as the surface

wind. Also, this wind’s height must be zero
(0) feet or meters (AGL) or else RAOB will
display a warning message.

New or edited data will only be recorded if the

user presses the ENTER key.

RAOB continually checks data entries for

vertical consistency and against standard
wind data relationships.
106

13. DATA PROCESSING. All sounding data processing is based on the actual data obtained from the
source data file. No data interpolation or smoothing is employed, unless specifically selected by the user
from various program options. However, if a key application or parameter requires a specific value, such
as a 500 mb temperature, and the sounding does not have this value, then RAOB will interpolate the
required data for that specific need. Logarithmic interpolations are used when processing pressure/height
data. At a minimum, RAOB requires at least two levels of temperature or wind data to begin processing
the sounding. If using Coded data, these data can be from either the TTAA, TTBB, or PPBB data groups.
RAOB can process sounding data containing only temperature or only wind data.

13.1 Coded WMO Data. All data are processed from the surface through 1 mb, if available. In
addition to processing standard data items in each TTAA, TTBB, PPAA, PPBB, TTCC, TTDD, PPCC and
PPDD group, RAOB also processes TTAA's 88xxx data and TTBB's 21212 & 51515 wind data.

RAOB also detects and processes SHIP (UUAA, UUBB, etc.), LAND MOBILE (IIAA, IIBB, etc.), and
Hurricane Dropsonde data (XXAA, XXBB, etc.).

RAOB also detects whether winds are reported in meters-per-second or knots.

13.2 Raw Data. This is RAOB’s indigenous data format. All sounding data that is used by
RAOB is first converted to this internal format for all data processing purposes. Not only is the Raw
format the most basic form of sounding data, but it also reflects the structure of the sounding data as it is
originally obtained via the rawinsonde equipment. This Raw data format can be easily viewed and edited
by using the DeCoded Data Editor (F3).

When processing WMO Coded data, if adjacent pressure/temperature and height/wind data levels are
detected within 100 feet of each other, they are combined into a single data level. This simplifies vertical
integration of some key atmospheric parameters. Combined data groups not only eliminate duplicate data
elements, but they also result in data levels with a complete representation of atmospheric parameters
similar to the coded TTAA and TTCC standard data levels.

13.3 Data Quality Checks. Since coded rawinsonde data are quality checked prior to
dissemination, RAOB does not perform validity checks. However, RAOB performs basic format checks
on coded data and other data formats, and then flags the user if non-numeric data is detected. If the user
manually enters data using the Raw Data Editor, RAOB performs several validity checks during data entry.
For example, RAOB ensures that dew points are equal to or less than associated temperatures, and
heights and winds are checked against basic range limits. When a data anomaly is detected, an ERROR
message is displayed until a correction is made.

13.4 Numerical Analyses. All pressure-level heights are hydrostatically computed using the
standard hypsometric equation, where the mean virtual temperature of each layer is calculated. The
virtual potential temperature is used in the calculation of stability and mixing height factors. RAOB uses
the hydrostatically adjusted height information to create unique height scales for each sounding, thus
producing exact height readings for all pressure and height parameters.

The gravity factor (g) is adjusted for station elevation and latitude. If no coordinate information is
available, then a default 45° latitude value is used. (It is therefore important to provide the sounding
station’s elevation and coordinates to help ensure the most accurate data processing possible.) All
meteorological constants are taken from the International Meteorological Tables or the Smithsonian
Meteorological Tables. Data processing algorithms are taken from several standard, reliable sources.
107

14. SIGNIFICANT LEVELS.

14.1 Lifting Condensation Level (LCL). This is the height at which a parcel of air becomes
saturated when it is lifted dry-adiabatically. The LCL is typically used to identify the base of clouds from
lifting due to terrain and frontal systems. The LCL for a surface parcel is found at or below the CCL.

14.2 Convective Condensation Level (CCL)*. This is the height to which a parcel of air, if heated
sufficiently from below, will rise adiabatically until condensation starts. This is typically used to identify the
base of cumuliform clouds, which are normally produced from surface heating and thermal convection. By
using the day’s maximum surface temperature (along with the corresponding dewpoint and necessary
upper-level temperature adjustments), the maximum potential instability of the day’s atmosphere can be
determined.

14.3 Level of Free Convection (LFC). This is the height at which a parcel of air lifted dry-
adiabatically until saturated (at the LCL), then lifted moist-adiabatically thereafter would first become
warmer than the surrounding air (sounding temperature profile) -- at the LFC. The parcel will then
continue to rise freely above the LFC until it becomes colder than the temperature profile (surrounding air)
-- at the EL (see below). The LFC is a critical component to other variables, which are dependent on how
the LFC is determined. For that reason, RAOB can be configured to calculate the LFC from three
different methods (see PROGRAM CONFIGURATION Section). These methods are defined with respect
to the LPL (see below).

14.4 Lifted Parcel Level (LPL). Identifies the level from which parcel lifting processes begin. See
PROGRAM CONFIGURATION for more information.

14.5 Equilibrium Level (EL)*. This is the height where the temperature of a buoyantly rising
parcel again becomes equal to (and then cooler than) the temperature of the environment. The
equilibrium level is the point in the atmosphere where the temperature of a rising parcel, following a moist
adiabat, crosses back over the temperature plot/profile. Parcel lifting typically begins from either the CCL
or LFC, depending on current atmospheric dynamics. Thus, ELs are usually defined as two different
types, the EL resulting from convection initiated from the CCL (ccl-EL) and the EL resulting from
convection initiated from the LFC (lfc-EL). The EL is commonly used to estimate the tops of convective
clouds, especially thunderstorms. The user controls how the EL is calculated by choosing whether lifting
occurs from the CCL or LFC. This choice is made through the program Configuration Options (Tab 3),
CAPE Base Level.

14.6 Maximum Parcel Level (MPL). MPL is the level above a parcel's EL where the negative
buoyant energy cancels any excess CAPE(B+) energy. MPL represents the potential height of convective
cloud tops. MPL is displayed with graphics and text on the sounding diagram and as text in the Analysis
data summary. Energy areas between the parcel's EL and the MPL are shaded in a light blue color. An
MPL can only exist if the CAPE (B+) is greater than CIN (B-).

14.7 WetBulb Zero (WBZ) height. This is the height where the wet-bulb profile transitions from a
positive to a negative temperature. The wet-bulb profile (plotted in green) can be displayed when viewing
the sounding diagrams using the Analyses toolbar. WBZ data is commonly used as one of many factors
in estimating hail size and severe weather potential.

14.8. Tropopauses. RAOB determines tropopause locations in accordance with the WMO
st nd rd
definition of the 1 , 2 , and 3 tropopause (if they exist), including applicable of the 3 qualifying remarks
regarding short soundings, tropopauses below 500 mb, and lapse rate rules. The “first tropopause” is
typically defined as the conventional tropopause. RAOB always determines the location of the
tropopause(s), even if the sounding source file contains such information.

* The CCL and ccl-EL levels are derived from a mean mixing ratio, regardless of the selected LPL.
108

15. SOUNDING INDICES.

Sounding indices are convenient numerical indicators of atmospheric stability and other key parameters.
The following indices are automatically calculated by RAOB and displayed throughout the program.
These indices are also available in RAOB’s Severe Weather Parameter Table. (See Sturtevant, 1995, for
additional discussion of these indices and related meteorological data, including interpretation and
application.) Standard severe weather threshold values are listed below. All temperatures are Celsius
(°C), unless otherwise indicated.

15.1 Boyden Index. This index was developed by the British Meteorological Office to forecast the
probability of frontal thunderstorms in the UK (Boyden, 63). Available documentation indicates that it
forecasts correctly approximately 60 to 65 percent of the time. If the index is >94, then thunderstorms are
most likely.
Boyden Index = (1000-700mb Thickness) - T700 - 200
10

where the thickness is measured in meters, and T is in Celsius.

15.2 Bulk Richardson Number (BRN). BRN is the ratio between CAPE and a wind shear vector
difference (Hart & Korotky, 91).
2
BRN = CAPE / (.5 ∗ (BRN_SHR) )

where: BRN_SHR is the magnitude of the vector difference between the 0-6 km mean
wind and the 0-500 m mean wind, where both mean winds are density weighted.
The individual mean wind values are listed in the Analyses data screen display.

Note: The RAOB program also produces and evaluates the BRN Shear value, which
is composed of the entire denominator of the BRN number.

15.3 CAP. CAP strength, also called the Lid Index, is determined by finding the maximum
temperature difference between the environmental and the lifted parcel profiles, within the layer bounded
by the lifted parcel level and the LFC. The lifted profile is defined by the dry adiabat below the LCL and
the moist adiabat above the LCL. Note: CAP does not consider elevated convection, and it is a warm
season – warm sector index. CAP is meaningless if there is zero CAPE in the troposphere. A cap of 2
degrees Celsius or greater is a good inhibitor of convection. A strong cap can hold energy down too much
and thus cause thunderstorms not to break. A weak cap can cause development to occur before enough
energy builds up for the cells to become severe. A median of a strong cap and a weak cap (a cap
strength from 1-2°C) is generally ideal to allow enough time for energy to build and then break the cap,
allowing storms to go severe and possibly tornadic.

15.4 Craven SigSvr Parameter. The product of the 100 mb Mixed-Layer CAPE (MLCAPE) and
the 0-6 km magnitude of the vector difference (m/s; often referred to as “deep layer shear”) accounts for
the compensation between instability and shear magnitude. Units are scaled to the nearest 1000.

Craven = (mlCAPE J/Kg) * ( SHR6 m/s) / 1000

15.5 Cross Totals (CT) Index. This index is commonly used as a severe weather indicator and is
based on temperature and moisture data (AWS/TR 200).
CT = Td850 - T500

CT Index Thunderstorm Potential

< 20 Weak
20 to 28 Moderate
> 28 Strong
109

15.6 DCI (Deep Convective Index). The DCI (Barlow, 93) attempts to combine the properties of
equivalent potential temperature (ePT) at 850 mb with instability (via the Lifted Index, LI). The DCI
equation is presented below where the T and Td values reflect 850 mb temperature data:

DCI = T850 + Td850 - LI

15.7 Delta Theta-e. This parameter is displayed as “Delta ePT” within the RAOB program for
consistency with other program parameters. This parameter is used to assess the potential for “wet
microbursts” and is based on a study of pulse type storms during the summer over the southeastern U.S.
It is derived from the difference between the theta-e at the surface and the lowest theta-e in the mid levels
(Atkins and Wakimoto, 1991). RAOB defines Delta Theta-e between the surface and 300 hPa.

Delta ePT Wet Microburst Potential

> 20 Likely
< 13 Unlikely

15.8 DMP Gust. Dry Microburst Potential (DMP) Gust. The DMP Gust is derived from the "Dry
Microburst Potential" nomogram which is displayed on the "Severe Weather" display sounding diagram.
The "gust" value is produced from an algorithm using the 700 mb T-Td spread and the Upper Level
Instability Index (ULII or UI) value. UI (or ULII) is defined in AFWA TN-98/002, July 1998, page 3-25.

15.9 DMPI (Dry Microburst Potential Index). The DMPI was derived primarily by Wakimoto
(1985) during the JAWS project. Even though DMPI was originally developed in the Denver, CO region,
the RAOB program uniquely modifies the DMPI for the elevation of each sounding to ensure the algorithm
uses the same relative height logic. Instead of using the original 700 mb and 500 mb data levels, RAOB
uses 5,000 feet and 13,000 feet (AGL) data levels. This ensures DMPI results can be consistently used
for any worldwide sounding, regardless of elevation differences.

DMPI = G + (T - Td)5000ft - (T - Td)13000ft

G = Lapse Rate (deg C km-1 -5000 ft to 13000 ft)
T = Temperature (deg. C) and Td = Dew Point Temperature (deg. C)

15.10 Energy Helicity Index (EHI). RAOB calculates the Storm-Relative Helicity (s-rH), which
integrates the effects of streamwise vorticity and the storm-relative winds through the inflow layer
(Woodall, 90 and Leftwich, 90). Helicity has been found to correlate strongly with the development of
rotating updrafts. The correlation with tornadoes is less clear. It is an estimate of the rotation
(mesocyclone) potential for the storm moving through a vertically sheared environment. The EHI is a
function of the positive 0-2 km storm-relative Helicity (+s-rH) and CAPE (B+) values (LaPenta, 92).

EHI = ( +s-rH2km ∗ CAPE ) / 160,000

15.11 Flooding. RAOB's Flooding Potential index is the only flash-flood/heavy-rain metric that is
completely derived from the sounding's profile. All other flooding metrics require visual identification of the
sounding's structure along with evaluation of related atmospheric parameters. RAOB quantitatively
combines all profile information into a single index. It has the characteristic tall-skinny CAPE profile with
uniformly deep moisture profile. Other key features are cloud structure, deep warm cloud depth (WCD),
and high water content.

RAOB is able to determine a sounding's CAPE-profile and cloud-structure qualities through use of its
"pattern recognition" methodology. Like today's medical CT-Scan technologies, RAOB does this by first
creating multiple scans of key thermodynamic data elements through the entire sounding at 1-mb
intervals. Next RAOB performs numerous top-down and bottom-up interrogations to detect and then
quantify key sounding structures, such as profile lapse-rates, moisture patterns, cloud layers, precipitation
types, and wind relationships. Using proprietary coefficients, RAOB then combines these results with the
standard WCD and water-content parameters into a single flood potential index.
110

15.12 Fog Stability Index (FSI). FSI was developed by USAF meteorologists for use in Germany,
but can be applied to similar climates. It was introduced by the USAF publication 2WW/TN-79/008 and is
designed to indicate the potential for radiation fog.

FSI = 4 ∗ Ts - 2(T850 + TDs) + FF850

where: Ts = Surface Temp (C)

TDs = Surface Dewpoint (C)
FF850 = 850mb Wind Speed (kts)

FSI Likelihood of Radiation Fog

>55 Low
31 to 55 Moderate
<31 High

15.13 Fog Point. This value indicates the temperature at which radiation fog will form (AWS/FM-
90/001). It is determined by following the saturation mixing ratio line from the dew point curve at the LCL
pressure level to the surface (temperature).

15.14 Fog Threat. This value indicates the potential for radiation fog as described in AWS/FM-
90/001.
Fog Threat = WBPT850 - Fog Point
where: WBPT850 = 850mb wet bulb potential temperature.

Fog Threat Likelihood of Radiation Fog

>3 Low
0 to 3 Moderate
<0 High

15.15 GOES HMI. The GOES Hybrid Microburst Index (HMI) is designed to detect conditions
favorable for both wet and dry microbursts (Pryor, 2006), which are:

- Significant CAPE.
- A deep, dry adiabatic lapse rate layer below the cloud base.
- A dry (low theta-e) layer overlying a moist mid-tropospheric layer.

The GOES HMI algorithm is designed to sense aspects of an intermediate microburst environment by
incorporating the sub-cloud temperature lapse rate (between 670 and 850 mb levels) as well as the dew
point depression difference between the cloud base (670 mb) and the middle of the sub-cloud layer (850
mb). The Hybrid Microburst Index (HMI) is defined as:

HMI = G + (T – Td)850 – (T – Td)670

Where: G is the lapse rate in degrees Celsius per kilometer from 850 to 670 mb, and
T and Td are respective pressure level temperatures in degrees Celsius.

GOES HMI Downburst risk

<8 Downbursts Unlikely
8 - 24 Downbursts Likely
> 24 High Risk of Downbursts

15.16 Haines Index. This index was developed by Donald Haines (2000) to help forecast fire
“blow up” potential. This index is a function of lower atmospheric stability and moisture content. Both
parameters vary with respect to station elevation. Note: The Haines Index is also called the Lower
Atmospheric Stability Index (or LASI).
111

Haines Index = Stability Term + Moisture Term

Elevation Stability Term Moisture Term

Low T950 - D850 850 dewpoint depression
1 – 3C or less 1 – 5C or less
2 – 4 to 7C 2 – 6 to 9C
3 – 8C or more 3 – 10C or more
Mid T850 – T700 850 dewpoint depression
1 – 5C or less 1 – 5C or less
2 – 6 to 10C 2 – 6 to 12C
3 – 11C or more 3 – 13C or more
High T700 – T500 700 dewpoint depression
1 – 17C or less 1 – 14C or less
2 – 18 to 21C 2 – 15 to 20C
3 – 22C or more 3 – 21C or more

Haines Index Fire “blow up” Potential

2–3 Very Low
4 Low
5 Moderate
6 High

15.17 Heat Burst Index. The Heat Burst Index is an empirical proprietary RAOB index designed
to help forecast the rare "heat burst" event. The heat burst is a Dry Microburst event with exceptionally
high surface temperatures and damaging wind gusts. This index is able to capture the thermodynamic
and physical structure of the "Inverted-V" profile, which is the signature sounding shape associated with
dry microbursts and heat bursts. This index goes beyond the more limited DMPI (Dry Microburst Potential
Index) parameter, and includes lapse-rates, moisture profiles, cloud layers, wind shear, energy potential,
inversions, and other physical properties associated with the Inverted-V sounding structure. Since many
of these burst events contain little or no CAPE, the Heat Burst index can predict these events better than
the conventional CAPE-related storm indices..

Suggested Heat Burst index probability thresholds: >500 Weak

>750 Moderate
>1000 Strong

15.18 Humidity Index (HI). The Humidity Index is a standard moisture sampling algorithm proved
very reliable for instability measures and convection potential, especially in the Mediterranean regions of
the world (Litynska et al, 1976). Smaller HI values reflect higher moisture content and greater instability
potential. Note that the HI is similar to, but different than, the K Index, described later in this section. The
HI is also different than the THI (temperature humidity index), also described later in this section. As with
any index, the HI should be adjusted for geographic regions and seasonal variations.

HI Index = (T-Td)850 + (T-Td)700 + (T-Td)500

Humidity Index (HI) Instability Potential

> 50 Weak
30 - 50 Moderate
< 30 Strong

15.19 Jefferson Index (JI). The JI has been tested and used in both maritime and arid areas, and
is therefore very important that threshold values be adjusted for the local area of interest. Non-frontal
thunderstorms can be expected for index values of 27 or 28 and above (Jefferson, 63-66).
112

JI = 1.6 ∗ WBPT850 - T500 - .5 ∗ T_Depression700 - 8

where: WBPT is wet-bulb potential temperature.

15.20 K Index. The K Index is a function of 850, 700 and 500 mb temperature and moisture
information (Hart & Korotky, 91).

K Index = T850 + Td850 - T700 + Td700 - T500

K Index Thunderstorm Potential

< 25 Weak
25 to 35 Moderate
> 35 Strong

15.21 KO Index. This index was developed by the Deutsches Wetterdienst (German Weather
Bureau) to estimate thunderstorm potential in Europe. It is more sensitive to moisture than other, more
traditional, stability indices and is best used in cooler, moist climates (AWS/FM-90/001). If the surface
level is above 1000 mb, then θesurface is used. If any others are missing, then no KO Index is calculated.

(θe500 + θe700) (θe850 + θe1000)

KO Index = ------------------ - --------------------
2 2

where θe is equivalent potential temperature

KO Index Thunderstorm Potential

>6 Weak
2 to 6 Moderate
<2 Strong

15.22 Lifted Index (LI). The LI is a modified SI and eliminates the 850 mb dependency (Johns &
Doswell, 92). The LI is determined from the same process as that used for the SI, but the low level LCL is
found by using the mean moisture content in the lower 3000 feet.

LI Thunderstorm Potential
> -3 Weak
-3 to -5 Moderate
< -5 Strong

15.23 Maximum Vertical Velocity (MVV). This is the maximum vertical velocity of the potential
convective updraft. MVV is a function of CAPE(+).

MVV = √ ( 2 ∗ B+ )

15.24 Microburst Day Potential Index (MDPI). MDPI was developed by the 45WS and
NASA/Applied Meteorology Unit (AMU) as a result of a microburst event on 16 August 1994 (Wheeler
1996, 1997). This index is solely a function of the sounding’s equivalent potential temperatures (θe). The
following equation is based in part on the results from the Microburst and Severe Thunderstorm (MIST)
project (Atkins and Wakimoto, 1991). The greater the spread between the two numerator factors, the
greater the effect that relatively cool, dry environmental air will have on a developing downburst. When
113

the MDPI is greater than or equal to one, microbursts are likely. The 30 knot denominator is a local tuning
constant.
[ Maxθe (Sfc – 850mb) - Minθe (660 - <500mb) ]
MDPI = -------------------------------------------------------------
30 knots

15.25 Richardson Index (Ri). A non-dimensional number arising in the study of shearing flows of a
stratified fluid, where Ri = gB / (δU/δz)2θ ... where g is the acceleration of gravity, B a representative
vertical stability (commonly dθ/dz, where θ is potential temperature) and dU/dz a characteristic vertical
shear of the wind. Note that the virtual potential temperature is used to calculate the gB stability factor.

15.26 S Index. This index was developed by the German Military Geophysical Office (as
documented by 2WW/FM-88/001) and is primarily used to indicate thunderstorm potential from April
through September.

S Index = TT - (T - TD)700 - K (T and TD are 700mb temps)

where: K is defined as: 0 when VT >25
2 when VT >22 and <25
6 when VT <22

where: VT is the Vertical Totals index = T850 - T500

S Index Thunderstorm Potential

< 40 None
40 to 46 Possible
> 46 Likely

15.27 Severity. The Thunderstorm Severity Index is used to help measure and predict the severity of
thunderstorm events (Maglaras and LaPenta, 1997). Severity is calculated from this …

S = 4.943709 – 0.000777 * CAPE – 0.004005 * WMAX + 0.181217 * EHI – 0.026867 * SSPD – 0.006479 * SRH

Where: CAPE = positive Convective Available Potential Energy (J/kg)

WMAX = maximum wind speed in the sounding (kts)
EHI = Energy Helicity Index
SSPD = forward speed of the storm cell (kts)
2 2
SRH = Storm-relative Helicity (m /s )

Index Severity
S > 3.5 Non-Severe Event
2.5 < S < 3.5 Minor Event
1.5 < S < 2.5 Major Event
S < 1.5 Tornadic Event

15.28 SHERB Index. SHERB = Severe Hazards in Environments with Reduced Buoyancy.
For more information see ... https://sites.google.com/ncsu.edu/mdparker/hslc

15.29 Showalter Index (SI). The SI is dependent upon 850 mb data and is most reliable when
the moist layer extends above the 850 mb level (Hart & Korotky, 91). The SI is determined by following
the moist-adiabat from the 850 mb based LCL to 500 mb, and then subtracting the found temperature
from the 500 mb sounding temperature.

SI Thunderstorm Potential
>4 Weak
-4 to 4 Moderate
< -4 Strong
114

15.30 Significant Hail Parameter (SHIP). The SHIP index was developed using a large database
of surface-modified, observed severe hail proximity soundings. It is based on 5 parameters, and is meant
to delineate between significant (> 2” diameter) and non-significant (<2” diameter) hail environments.
SHIP values greater than 1 indicate a favorable significant hail environment, whereas values greater than
4 are considered very high. It is important to note that SHIP is “not” a forecast for hail size.

SHIP = (A * B * C * D * E ) / 44,000,000

Where: A = MU_CAPE (j/kg), where MU_CAPE = Most Unstable CAPE

B = Mixing Ratio of MU_Parcel (g/kg)
C = 700-500mb Lapse-Rate (c/km)
o
D = 500mb Temperature ( C)
E = 0-6km Shear (m/s)

15.31 Significant Tornado Parameter (STP). The STP is an index composed of four normalized
parameters that have some ability to discriminate between tornadic and non-tornadic supercells. A
majority of significant tornadoes (F2 or greater damage) have been associated with STP values greater
than 1, while most non-tornadic supercells have been associated with values less than 1.

The original STP algorithm is composed of four terms: ML_CAPE (mean layer CAPE), mean layer parcel
LCL, 0-1 km storm-relative helicity (SRH), and the 0-6 km shear magnitude. The “mean layer” depth is
defined as being the lower 100 mb, but this depth is configurable using the Parcel Lifting & CAPE tab of
the Program Options screen. The new STP algorithm replaces the 0-6 km shear with the surface-based
effective bulk shear, the SRH is replaced with the effective SRH value, and a new term is added – the
mean layer parcel CIN value. Like the SCP index, the “new” STP algorithm is only used if the Effective
SRH (ESRH) option is selected on the Algorithm Options tab of the Program Options screen.

15.32 Supercell Composite Parameter (SCP). The SCP is a multi-parameter index that includes
0-3-km storm-relative Helicity, CAPE, and BRN Shear. Each parameter is normalized to supercell
“threshold” values. SCP values greater than 5 usually represent the threshold of significant cell
development.

The original SCP algorithm is composed of three terms: MU_CAPE (most unstable CAPE), 0-3 km storm-
relative helicity (SRH), and the BRN shear value. The new SCP algorithm replaces the BRN value with
the effective bulk shear and the 0-3 km SRH is replaced with the effective SRH. Like the above STP
index, the “new” SCP algorithm is only used if the Effective SRH (ESRH) option is selected on the
Algorithm Options tab of the Program Options screen.

15.33 SWEAT Index. SWEAT was specifically created to help predict severe thunderstorms and
tornadic activity (AWS/TR 200). Caution: SWEAT should not be used to predict ordinary thunderstorms.

SWEAT = 12 ∗ Td850 + 20 ∗ (TT-49) + 2 ∗ F850 + F500 + 125 ∗ (S+.2)

where: Td850 is set to zero if value is negative

(TT-49) is set to zero if value is negative, where TT = Total Totals
F850 is speed of 850 mb wind in knots
F500 is speed of 500 mb wind in knots
S is the Sine of (500 mb - 850 mb wind directions)

and: 125 ∗ (S+.2) is set to zero if any of the following are not met:
850 mb wind must be in the 130° through 250° range
500 mb wind must be in the 210° through 310° range
500 mb - 850 mb wind direction must be positive
500 mb and 850 mb wind speeds are at least 15 knots
115

SWEAT Thunderstorm Potential

< 300 Weak
300 to 399 Moderate
400 to 599 Strong
> 600 High
1
15.34 T Gust. This method is quite reliable in indicating maximum average wind gusts, as
described in AWS/TR 200. If the sounding has an inversion, the moist adiabat is followed from the
warmest point in the inversion to 600 millibars. The temperature difference between the intersection of
the moist adiabat at the 600-mb isobar and the temperature of the dry bulb at 600 mb is T1. If no
inversion appears on the sounding, or if the inversion is above 200 mb above the surface, then T1 is found
by projecting the moist adiabat from the surface temperature (maximum forecast temperature) to the 600-
mb level, and then taking the difference between the 600-mb moist adiabat intersection and the 600 mb
1
dry-bulb temperature. T Gust is obtained by applying the T1 value to a Gust table found in AWS/TR 200.

Prior to the RAOB 6.2 program, only the sounding’s temperature data were used to compute the gust
factors. Using supplemental options in AWS/TR 200, the maximum peak gust is determined by adding
1/3 of the mean wind expected in the lower 5,000 feet AGL to the temperature-derived gust values. An
additional option is used to determine the wind direction of this maximum peak gust by finding the mean
wind direction in the layer between 10,000 to 14,000 AGL. If the gust wind direction can not be found due
to a lack of wind data above 10,000 feet, then the zero value is used for the “wind direction” to indicate a
variable (VRB) wind direction. If wind data are not available at any level, then RAOB reverts to calculating
these gust factors using only temperature data. Note that use of the sounding’s upper-level wind direction
2
is also applied to the T Gust factor as described next, but not for the low-level wind speed values.
2 2
15.35 T Gust. The maximum probable gust as derived from the T method (AWS/TR 200) is
most useful for isolated air-mass thunderstorms and/or squall line gust potential. The method first finds
the surface temperature identified by the moist adiabat that intersects the WBZ. This temperature is then
subtracted from the surface dry-bulb temperature, which is then applied to a non-linear relationship
between the calculated temperature difference and surface gusts. This method works best with the
passage of a thunderstorm in association with moderate to heavy rain. Note that this method only uses
the sounding's temperature profile and that the sounding's winds are not a factor. Gust output is displayed
2
in knots. Note that the T Gust factor does not incorporate the low-level mean wind speed data, but can
use the upper-level wind direction as described in the preceding paragraph.

15.36 Temperature Humidity Index (THI). The THI, also known as the discomfort index,
determines the effect of summer conditions on human comfort, by combining temperature and humidity.
Studies have shown that relatively few people in the summer will be uncomfortable from heat and humidity
while THI is 70 or below; about half will be uncomfortable when THI reaches 75; and almost everyone will
be uncomfortable when THI reaches 79.
.03755T .0801(D-14)
THI = T – 1.0799e [1 – e ] where: T = temperature (ºC)
D = dewpoint (ºC)

15.37 Thompson Index (TI). The TI is primarily used to determine thunderstorm potential in the
Rocky Mountains (Sturtevant, 95).
TI = K Index - LI.

TI Thunderstorm Potential
< 30 Weak
30 to 35 Moderate
> 35 Strong
116

5.38 Tropical Cyclone Tornado Parameters (TCTP):

Tornado~TC. RAOB's unique TCTP which is a combination of statistical and empirical

relationships and is completely composed of sounding data and independent of external data. While
specific Tornado~TC component coefficients remain proprietary, the contributing components are (1)
Favorable environmental lapse-rate structure*, (2) Low-level shear, (3) SRH, and (4) a mid-level dry layer.
RAOB detects and quantifies the mid-level dry layer using the program's unique "pattern recognition"
scanning. As with any meteorological predictor, the user must apply local conditions to maximize
parameter effectiveness. All TCTP studies find that the greatest probability for tornado development is in
the right-front quadrant of moving tropical cyclones -- which the Tornado~TC index always assumes.

TCTP~UNC. This TCTP was created by Dr Eastin from the University of North Carolina
as Charlotte. It's component factors are (1) 0-3 km shear, (2) 0-1 km SHR, and (3) the mean RH 2-4 km.
Study results show that tornadoes are likely when TCTP values are greater than 1.0.

15.39 Total Totals (TT) Index. This index is commonly used as a severe weather indicator and is
based on temperature and moisture data (AWS/TR 200).

TT = T850 + Td850 - 2 ∗ T500

TT Index Thunderstorm Potential

< 45 Weak
45 to 55 Moderate
> 55 Strong

15.40 TQ Index. The TQ Index is used to assess the low-topped convection potential.

TQ = (T850 + Td850) – 1.7 * (T700)

TQ Index Low-Topped Convection Potential

Lower troposphere is unstable and TSRA is possible
> 12
outside of stratiform clouds.
Lower troposphere is unstable and TSRA is possible
> 17
when stratiform clouds are present.

15.41 Ventilation Index. This index is used for air pollution management throughout the United
States (Hardy et al, 2002). It is the product of the mixing height and mean wind speed (or Transport
Wind) of the mixing layer. Some use the surface wind speed or the wind speed at the height of a smoke
stack, for example. The TransportM and TransportP wind parameters are the "mean" and "peak" mixing
layer winds (respectively), which can be listed on screen or exported.

Ventilation Index Classification

(square meters per second)
0 – 1200 Poor
1201 – 2400 Marginal
2401 – 3600 Fair
> 3600 Good

15.42 Vertical Totals (VT) Index. This index is commonly used as a severe weather indicator and
is based on temperature and moisture data (AWS/TR 200).

VT = T850 - T500
117

VT Index Thunderstorm Potential

> 28 Possible

15.43 Violent Tornado Parameter (VTP). The VTP is an augmented STP (Significant Tornado
Parameter) parameter. It is used to help identify very strong tornados. (Hampshire, et al.)
o
VTP = STP * 3CAPE/50 J/Kg * 3LR/6.5 C/km)

where: 3CAPE = MLCAPE from 0-3 km AGL (capped at a value of 2.0)

3LR = Lapserate from 0-3 km AGL

15.44 Vorticity Generation Parameter (VGP). The VGP is the rate at which horizontal vorticity is
converted to vertical vorticity through tilting.

VGP = S ∗ √CAPE
Where S is the mean 0-x km shear (length of the 0-x km hodograph divided by x).
Typical VGP ranges are: .116 for ordinary cells
.213 for supercells
.270 for significant tornadic supercells

15.45 Warm Cloud Depth (WCD). The WCD is the distance between the LCL and where the
lifted parcel crosses the freezing level. The larger the depth between the two levels, the deeper the layer
over which the warm rain process can occur (Cotton & Anthes). Values of WCD for heavy rain vary by
region, with typical values for the Midwestern United States between 2.5 - 3.0 km while southeastern
United States values range from 3 - 4 km. The WCD is sometimes called the COAL, or the warm rain
coalescence layer.

15.46 Water Vapor. The IWV (Integrated Water Vapor) parameter is vertically integrated water
vapor density, where vapor density is defined as the water vapor pressure divided by the specific gas
constant and the temperature (Kelvin). When then divided by the density of water vapor, you then get the
total water (Precipitable Water Vapor) value. The LWP (Liquid Water Path) value, however, consists of
the vertical integration of LWC values, or liquid water content data.

15.47 Waterspout Indexes.

WaterSpout1. Charleston (NWS) Index for the Southeast US. This “non-tornadic” waterspout index is
produced from an algorithm composed of 18 different parameters, including CAPE, wind speeds, lapse
rates and others. The index was developed by Pete Mohlin, a NOAA/NWS forecaster. RAOB calculates
the Waterspout Index and produces a numeric value, which the developer has categorized accordingly…

Waterspout Index Waterspout Risk

59 - 86 High Risk
37 - 58 Moderate Risk
15 - 36 Low Risk
0 - 14 None

WaterSpout2. Szilagyi Waterspout Index (SWI) for the US Great Lakes region. Output ranges from 0-
10. The SWI source nomogram is shown at right. RAOB contains code which transforms the SWI
nomogram into numeric algorithms. This index is unique in that it requires one external input, the Sea
Surface Temperature, which is user-defined within RAOB's "Program Configuration Options, on the
"Parcel Lifting & CAPE" tab.
118

The Szilagyi Waterspout Index (SWI) nomogram ...

WaterSpout3. Key West (NWS) Florida probability estimate index. This NWS proprietary index was
developed by Andrew Devanas, Science and Operations Officer at NWS Key West and Lydia Stefanova,
FSU COAPS (Weather & Forecasting, April 2018). RAOB calculates this index using the following
parameters: Total-Totals, Corfidi Down Speed, 3,000 foot layer mean wind, 1000-700 mb lapse-rate, 100
mb wind, and the surface wind. Output values range from 0 to 100% probability "estimate" of occurrence.

15.48 Wet Microburst Severity Index (WMSI). WMSI (Pryor & Ellrod) was developed to better
assess the potential severity of wet microbursts. WMSI was originally implemented as part of the GOES
sounder-derived product package and is gradually being used by other forecast services. WMSI is a
product of CAPE (positive values only, and using the Most Unstable lifting parcel option) and Delta Theta-
e (Delta ePT) – of which both parameters are calculated and displayed by RAOB.

WMSI = (CAPE * Delta ePT) / 1000

WMSI Wind Gusts (kt)

< 10 Convection/Microbursts Unlikely
10 - 49 < 35
50 - 79 35 – 49
> 80 > 50

15.49 WINDEX. WINDEX is an index of microburst potential and is a measure of downdraft

instability. The WINDEX equation was obtained from Donald McCann's article in Weather and
Forecasting, Dec 94. Like the above surface gust potential, WINDEX is also only based on the sounding's
temperature profile. WINDEX is also displayed in knots.

15.50 Wind-Chill Temperature index. This index quantifies the threat of rapid cooling during
breezy or windy conditions that may result in hypothermia in cold conditions. The WCT equation is from
the United States National Weather Service.
0.16 0.16
WCT = 35.74 + 0.6215 * T – 35.75 * V + 0.4275 * T * V

Where: V is wind speed in mph and T is temperature in ºF

119

16. SOUNDING ANALYSES. CAUTION: The derivations and category classifications for the following
atmospheric parameters use but one of several methods available, and therefore, the resulting output
from RAOB should not be interpreted as definitive solutions. Additionally, probability data are provided as
objective indicators of the likelihood of icing and turbulence, and like the above caution, they are not
absolute indicators of subject events.

16.1 CAPE

Convective Available Potential Energy (CAPE). Both positive (CAPE) and negative (CIN or Convective
Inhibition) buoyancy totals can be automatically displayed on the sounding diagram. CAPE energy is
summed only above the LCL (note 1). CIN energy is summed both above and below the LCL.

EL EL
CAPE = -R ∫ δT d(lnp) CIN = -R ∫ δT d(lnp)
Base LPL

δT = TParcel – Tenvironment (where T can be Dry Bulb or Virtual temperature)

Base = LFC or CCL
LPL = the level of the lifted parcel (e.g., surface, best_level, etc.)

CAPE and CIN can be displayed in several ways. The ANALYSES Toolbar has two options, “Lift Parcel”
and “CAPE”. The Lift Parcel option highlights the CAPE/CIN areas by tracing the path of the lifted parcel
(note 2). The CAPE option shades the CAPE and CIN areas red and blue, respectively.

________________________________________________________________________

CAPE Notes:

1. There is a special situation when only a portion of the lapse rate below the LCL is superadiabatic -- a
positive energy area. These areas are typically small and infrequent. Since the author could not find any
literature describing the appropriate mathematical disposition of these areas, they were not applied to the
CAPE or CIN values.

2. The dry adiabat cannot be “traced” via the Lift Parcel option when the entire low-level lapse rate is
superadiabatic -- under this condition only the mixing ratio line is traced.
________________________________________________________________________

CAPE is typically calculated with respect to the LFC level. RAOB also provides an option to calculate
CAPE with respect to the CCL level, but only if the surface parcel is lifted. CCL selection can be made
from the Lift Parcel option by right-clicking on the toolbar button which will then display the configuration
screen. When CAPE is calculated using the CCL as the base, the lifted parcel's free air temperature is
identified by the Convective Temperature (Tc). The CCL based CAPE simulates the onset of convection
due to low-level heating, whereas the LFC based CAPE simulates the onset of convection due to dynamic
lifting, such as those produced by frontal and orographic processes.

RAOB offers the user options to calculate and display CAPE in two different ranges. CAPE can be
calculated throughout the entire depth of the sounding, or between the LFC and a specified height (km)
above the LFC, or both. These values can be displayed on the sounding diagram and/or exported.

RAOB also offers the option to calculate CAPE with respect to the Dry Bulb or Virtual temperature profiles.
These temperature options can also be identified during program configuration or via the sounding
diagram's LIFT menu. The use of Virtual temperature to calculate CAPE is a suggested standard
methodology as recommended by Doswell and Rasmussen (Weather and Forecasting, Dec 94). Doswell
and Rasmussen also recommend that the most unstable level in the lowest 300 mb be used as the lifting
parcel. An example of the Virtual Temperature and lowest 300 mb program settings can be seen in the
example Program Configuration menu screen as seen next.
120

Virtual Temperature (Tv) Correction Notes. Tv correction is accomplished by first calculating the parcel
ascent curve of the original sounding profile and then applying the Tv correction to this ascent curve. The
Tv corrected parcel ascent curve uses the dewpoint of the ascending parcel (which is along the mixing
ratio line below the saturation point, and is equal to the temperature along the moist adiabat which the
parcel ascends at and above the saturation point). The LCL is always the same as that found using the
uncorrected parcel ascent process, whereas the CAPE, CIN, LFC, EL are found from the Tv corrected
sounding’s ascent trace. Also, the Tv correction process almost always pushes the LFC point to the right
and down (toward warmer temperatures and higher pressures). Sometimes, the LFC is at the surface!

Normalized CAPE (NCAPE). NCAPE is CAPE that is divided by the depth of the buoyancy layer. Values
near or less than .1 suggest a “tall, skinny” CAPE profile with relatively weak parcel accelerations, while
values closer to .3 to .4 suggest a “fat” CAPE profile with large parcel accelerations possible. Normalized
CAPE and lifted indices are similar measures of instability. (Blanchard, 98)

NCAPE = CAPE / (Elhgt – LFChgt)meters

Downdraft CAPE (DCAPE). DCAPE is defined as the maximum energy available to a descending parcel.
RAOB defines DCAPE as the graphical area between the environmental temperature curve and the moist
downdraft adiabat, and between the surface and a user-defined depth (typically 6 km, AGL). The
downdraft adiabat is defined by the sounding’s moist adiabat that corresponds to a specified wet-bulb
temperature. Initial DCAPE methods used the coldest wet-bulb temperature to define the moist adiabat
(which is one of RAOB’s options), but this has been shown to frequently over-forecast storm potential,
because this method does not adequately address entrainment. Therefore, most now recommend the
use of a weighted average of all DCAPEs through the layer of interest, using air density as the weighting
factor … which the RAOB program also offers as an option. If a sounding contains numerous data points
within the 6 km layer, the DCAPE calculations can take a long time. Therefore, RAOB offers the
user three options depending on desired processing speed and needed accuracy. All options are
rd
presented on the 3 tab (Parcel Lifting & CAPE) of the RAOB Program Configuration Options (F9).

Option #1. Density weighted average. This is the slowest, but most desirable method. It calculates the
DCAPE for each temperature data point between the surface and 6 km. For example, if the sounding’s 6
km layer contains 11 temperature points including the surface temperature, then RAOB calculates 10
individual DCAPEs using the moist adiabat associated with each data point, and then takes the density-
weighted average. Note: all CAPE/DCAPE calculations are performed at the 1 mb (hPA) interval for
maximum accuracy; and if the 6 km layer represents a 500 mb thickness, then DCAPE would perform
5,000 calculations, plus the final average. Each integration involves several significant processing steps.

Option #2. Average wet-bulb temperature. This option is faster than #1 but somewhat slower than #3.
This option first finds the average wet-bulb temperature in the 6 km layer before performing integrations.
This is the best option when analyzing high-density soundings.
121

Option #3. Coldest wet-bulb temperature. This is the fastest option and is provided since the above
density weighted method (#1) can significantly slow down RAOB performance, especially if the user PC
has a relatively slow processor and there are many temperature points in the 6 km layer. Note: when data
files with multiple soundings are looped, and if Option #1 is selected, RAOB automatically reverts to the
faster Option #3 for DCAPE calculations, then switches back to Option #1 when looping stops.

Forecasters at the NWS’ Storm Prediction Center have found that, in general, DCAPE values tend to be
lower for F2+ tornado environments and larger for damaging wind/hail environments. Initial research on
storm threshold potential has produced the following general relationships:

DCAPE Value Storm Potentail

< 600 J/kg small
600 – 1000 J/Kg modest
1000 – 1400 J/Kg large
> 1400 J/Kg extreme

16.2 Contrails. Condensation trails (contrails) are elongated tubular-shaped clouds composed of water
droplets or ice crystals that form behind jet aircraft when the exhaust wake becomes supersaturated with
respect to water. Depending upon their origin, they are sometimes called either “aerodynamic” or “engine-
exhaust” trails. Contrails are possible if a critical temperature (Tcrit) threshold is reached. AWS/TR -
81/001 provides the following algorithm for Tcrit, which is a polynomial that is second-order in the natural
logarithm of pressure and third-order regarding relative humidity:
2
x = -93.9 + 4.92∗ln(p) + 0.45∗ln(p)
2 3
y = 0.30∗RH% - 0.0074∗RH% + 0.000053∗RH%
Tcrit = x + y

Tcrit is only calculated for pressure level data between 1000 and 40 millibars. If the environmental
temperature is at or below the Tcrit temperature, then RAOB will display contrail information. RAOB’s
Analyses toolbar “Contrail” option will graphically highlight areas of contrail potential, while the Listing’s
Complete Data tab will also provide the Tcrit temperature.

16.3 Convective Temperature (Tc). The Tc is found by following the dry adiabat from the CCL down to
the surface level. The Tc is the temperature the surface of the earth must warm to in order for
thunderstorms to occur in the absence of synoptic forcing mechanisms. The Tc is most likely to be
reached in the late afternoon hours. Once the Tc is reached, air parcels can rise freely to the CCL and will
thus be free to rise due to positive buoyancy throughout the troposphere to develop thunderstorms. The
strength of the CAP (or LID index) determines if the convective temperature will be reached. When the
CAP is very strong, the convective temperature will be higher than the high temperature for that day and
thus no storms develop. The amount of low level moisture also determines storm development. A higher
CCL results in a higher Tc.

16.4 Corfidi MSC Vectors. These Mesoscale Convective System (MCS) vectors were developed by
Corfidi to better forecast storm motions. There are two vectors – the Upshear and Downshear vectors.

The Corfidi Upshear Vector is commonly referred to as the meso-beta scale convective elements (MBE)
vector (Corfidi, 1996). The MBE vector (VMBE) is defined as …

VMBE = (VCL – VLLJ)

Where: VCL = vector of the Cloud Layer (850-300 mb mean wind)
VLLJ = vector of the Low-Level Jet (Bonner, 1968)
Where Low-Level Jet exists at or below 1.5 km AGL.

The Corfidi Downshear Vector is commonly referred to as the “forward propagating” MCC vector (Corfidi,
2003), where the Cloud Layer vector is added to the MBE (or Upshear) vector.
122

16.5 Downrush Temperature. The downrush temperature is found by extending a line moist-
adiabatically from welt-bulb zero (WBZ) to the surface.

16.6 Fog Layers. Fog layer analyses are derived independently of the Fog FSI, Fog Threat, and Fog
Point parameters as defined in the previous Sounding Indices section of this manual. Whereas those
three fog parameters were derived for a specific European region, these "Fog Layer" analyses are globally
applicable. Similar to the Inversions and Frontal Layers analytical options, the fog layers can be displayed
on the sounding diagram through use of the Analyze Toolbar as depicted below.

By right-clicking on the
Fog Layer toolbar
button seen above, the
Fog Display Options
menu appears as
shown to the right.

Options include fog

threshold criteria and
fog boundary
conditions. This gives
the user the flexibility to
specify moist regions
with respect to low
cloud versus fog
conditions.

Graphic display options

include color definitions
and coordinated text
identification editors.

Fog layers can also be

displayed on cross-
sections.
123

Fog Layers continued …

Algorithms used to identify the “ice” and “freezing” fog layers were obtained from Dr. Ismail Gultepe
(ICCP, July 2008).

Ice fogs commonly occur in the northern latitudes when temperatures are below -20ºC. Normally,
formation of ice fog happens when the relative humidity becomes saturated with respect to ice (RHi).
Although the RHi threshold is user-configurable (see prior page), the program default value is >95%. RHi
is defined below:

RHi = ei(Tf) / esi(T)

Where: ei(Tf) = vapor pressure with respect to the frost-point temperature.

esi(T) = vapor pressure with respect to the environment temperature.
Tf = frost-point temperature = Dewpoint temperature (Td) + ∆ƒ
3 2
Where: ∆ƒ = p1Td + p2Td + p3Td + p4

p1 = 0.000006 p2 = -0.0003 p3 = -0.1122 p4 = 0.1802

Note that the frost-point temperature can be higher than the environment temperature (T). In order to help
identify the three fog layers (ice fog, freezing fog, wet fog) found in different temperatures, the following
table shows how RAOB classifies fog layers…

Fog type Temperature Threshold

Ice < -10ºC

Freezing (Frz) > -10ºC and < 0ºC

Wet > 0ºC

16.7 Hail. Hail size is estimated using procedures developed from data obtained in reports of wind-
tunnel tests and estimates of updraft velocities in thunderstorms (Fawbush & Miller, 53). The derived hail
size is reduced if the sounding's WBZ height is above 10,500 feet, which simulates hail melt in tropical air.

16.8 Icing.

Carburetor Icing. Carburetor (or induction) icing occurs whenever the cooling effect of the air flowing
through the carburetor is sufficient to bring the temperature of the carburetor throat down to 32ºF (0ºC) or
colder AND there is sufficient moisture in the air. In 1970 the Fuels and Lubricants Laboratory of the
National Research Council of Canada conducted a study of carburetor icing in aircraft engines. A report
submitted by L. Gardner and G. Moon of the laboratory contained a chart of the icing probability of light
aircraft engines which was based on the data by the D.O.T. Accident Investigation Division (AOPA PILOT,
1988). The RAOB program uses this icing chart (which is a function of ambient air temperature versus
dewpoint temperature) to determine carburetor icing categories. RAOB’s carburetor icing categories
range from 1 through 4 and represent the following chart criteria for increasing levels of icing severity:

1 - Light icing – glide or cruise power.

2 - Serious icing – glide power.
3 - Moderate icing – cruise power, or Serious icing – glide power.
4 - Serious icing – cruise or climb power.
124

Structural Icing. Structural (or wing) icing can be derived by RAOB from one of three different criteria.
RAOB refers to these three criteria as the Smith-Feddes, AFGWC, and USAF methodologies, which can
be specified during program configuration. For the Smith-Feddes and USAF methods, the resulting liquid
water content (LWC) values are matched to icing categories (LGT, MDT, etc.), which are based on NACA
studies (Lewis, 47).

• The Smith-Feddes algorithms (Smith, 74 and Feddes, 74) are based on an initial maximum cloud LWC
values for each cloud level. The LWC of each level is then adjusted for relative height within the cloud,
the presence of precipitation, fraction of liquid versus frozen cloud droplets, and amount of sky cover.

• The AFGWC criteria are discussed in AFCCC/TN-95/004, A Comparison of Aircraft Icing Forecast
Models (1995), where the AFGWC (RAOB) method proved better than the NODDS or TESS icing
algorithms. The AFGWC method is the default for this RAOB program. The AFGWC method uses
temperature, moisture, and lapse rate to determine icing conditions. Unlike the other two icing options,
this method only produces three categories (trace, light, moderate) while the others also produce the
“severe” intensity category. Additionally, this method does not produce icing probabilities (as explained
below).

• The USAF criteria are based on USAF Air Weather Service studies as reflected in AWS/TR-80/001
(Lewis, 47). RAOB automates the graphical methodology employed by the AWS/TR, including the two
nomograms, which were designed as overlays for the USAF Skew-T Log-P diagrams (Cox, 59), one for
frontal environments and the other for non-frontal environments. The original methodology requires the
user to apply the nomograms to layers containing sufficient moisture to produce icing. Instead of using
cloud layers as an icing prerequisite like the Smith-Feddes method, the USAF method determines
sufficient moisture using a minimum relative humidity value as an icing threshold. This icing threshold is
user-definable during program configuration and diagram display options. A 85% relative humidity
threshold is suggested for initial processing. This threshold should be adjusted as based on known cloud
layer RH values with respect to actual icing conditions. (Note: RAOB generated cloud layers are not used
for USAF icing calculations.) This icing method is also dependent on the existence of frontal systems.
RAOB automatically determines frontal presence via frontal inversions. The user can override automatic
frontal detection by clicking on the designated prompt just below the plotted diagram. RAOB determines
the base of icing layers (in millibars) as a function of either the LCL or the RH threshold, as appropriate.

Rime ice is indicated if the sounding is absolutely stable, whereas, clear ice is indicated if the sounding is
conditionally unstable. Mixed ice can occur within the intermediate zones.

Icing probabilities are derived from several studies correlating icing to both air temperatures and
temperature-dew point spreads. The icing probability data is the product of two non-linear correlations:
one is a function of temperature and the other is a function of the temperature-dew point spread. For
reference, the temperature-based probability is 100% if the temperature is -8°C (with decreasing
probabilities in either temperature direction), while the probability based on temperature-dew point spread
is 100% at saturation (with decreasing probabilities with drier conditions). Although icing probabilities are
indicated for each icing level, these probability studies were based on icing reported in stratiform clouds.

16.9 Inversions. RAOB only detects and lists the first 10 inversions above the surface. Inversion
information can be graphically displayed onto the plotted sounding diagram via the Analyses Menu option
or can be viewed via the Listing’s Analyses Tab. Three types of inversions are possible:

Radiation - Only exists at the surface.

Frontal - Exists where both temperature and dewpoint increase with height.
Subsidence - Exists where temperature increases and dewpoint decreases with height.

Very weak or very shallow inversions are not listed. This weak/shallow threshold is user-configurable and
can be specified from the Program Options menu as seen on the next page…
125

(see discussion on prior page)

16.10 Lightning Potential. The probability of an upper-level lightning event is indicated as a “YES” for
applicable data levels listed under the Complete Listing’s LTNG item. Lightning can also be graphically
overlaid the plotted sounding using the Analyses toolbar “Lightning” option. Lightning is determined for
each sounding level where the following criteria are met (Appleman, 71). Note … for the most accurate
analyses for both icing and lightning research (especially for post-analysis and forensic work), it is always
best to manually enter known or measured cloud layer data using RAOB’s Cloud Layer Table (F12).

- Temperature is within ±8°C

- Height is > 3000 feet AGL.
- Cumuliform clouds exist.

16.11 Liquid Water Content (LWC). Maximum cloud LWC is determined from the Smith-Feddes matrix,
which is strictly a function of cloud type and air (dry-bulb) temperature. LWC is only calculated for levels,
which contain both temperature and cloud layer data.

16.12 Low-Level Wind Shear (LLWS). LLWS is only calculated for the lower 2000 feet AGL, from
which original studies were based (7WW, 91). Categories follow:

Vertical Wind Shear Category

1-4 kts / 30 m Light

5-8 kts / 30 m Moderate
9-12 kts / 30 m Strong
> 12 kts / 30 m Severe

16.13 Potential Vorticity Units (PVU). PVU are a function of density, Coriolis, and Theta gradients:

PVU = 1/Density * Coriolis * d(Theta)/d(Z)

16.14 Precipitable Water. This is the total precipitable water of the entire sounding column. It
represents a vertical integration of mean mixing ratios. RAOB displays Water as the Total Precipitable
Water, and Eff_Water as the Effective Precipitable Water. Eff_Water is always less than Water, because
it takes into account the lower relative humidity layers the rain must fall through. (For additional
information on water calculations, see discussions on IWV and LWP for more information.)
126

16.15 Refractivity. The following algorithms were obtained from the VHF/UHF MANUAL (3rd edition).

N-Units. Atmospheric refractivity (N-units) are calculated via the following equation:

N = ( 77.6 / T ) ∗ ( P + (4810 ∗ e) / T ) where T = temp(K), P = pres(mb), e = vapor pres(mb)

When the N-unit gradient is greater than 157 N/km, electromagnetic (EM) propagation is "trapped" and
EM ducting typically occurs below this layer. The 157 N/km is the (configurable) default value.

K-Units. Potential refractivity (K-units, and sometimes referred to as B-units) are calculated via
the following equation, where all temperature and moisture data are adiabatically adjusted to 1000 mb:

K = ( 77.6 / PT ) ∗ ( 1000 + (4810 ∗ ε) / PT ) where PT = potential temperature (K)

ε = vapor pres (mb) at 1000 mb of the dew-point adjusted to 1000 mb via the mixing ratio line.

K-units have the advantage of emphasizing major air mass discontinuities of interest in radio meteorology.
K-unit gradients are easily observed in vertical cross-sections and time-sections.

16.16 Storm Motion Prediction. Storm motion prediction is determined by one of two methods: the
Bunkers Method or the Traditional (30-Deg & 75% Steering Flow) Method.

• The Bunkers Method is an “internal dynamics” method of predicting supercell motion that is physically
based and shear-relative. It has been shown to be statistically superior to other simple statistical methods
by Bunkers et al (Weather & Forecasting, Feb 2000). This method was obtained from a statistical sample
of many supercell motions associated with many wind profiles. This method, however, can produce
unrealistic results under conditions of relatively light winds.

In 2014 (J. Operational Meteor, 2[11]) the Universal Mean Wind option was added, which can better
define the storm steering flow for supercells of varying sizes and location. The base of the universal wind
layer is defined as the first level where CAPE >= 100 and CIN <= 250. The top of the universal wind layer
is by default defined at 65% of the MUCAPE EL (MUEL) height, where the MUEL is user configurable.

• The Traditional (30-Deg & 75% of the Steering Flow Wind) Method is a common statistical algorithm
using the 0-6 km thickness-weighted mean wind as the basis of calculations. The storm motion is typically
determined as 30 degrees to the right and 75% of the magnitude of the 0-6 km thickness weighted mean
wind. Using the Configuration Options menu, RAOB now permits the user to configure all parameters
associated with this method: flow depth, angular deviation, and speed percentage.

Storm motion calculations are based on the common assumption that supercells will deviate to the right of
(in the Northern Hemisphere), and move more slowly than, the mean. (Recent research indicates that the
use of higher mean wind layers, such as a 0-10 km mean wind, is better for larger storms.)

RAOB uses all available wind data to calculate the mean wind, where the winds are weighted according to
the relative vertical interval (thickness) of adjacent winds. It should be noted that mean steering winds can
also be calculated via density weighted winds, versus thickness weighted winds. RAOB however uses
thickness weighting since all wind data have associated height values, but only some wind data have
associated densities, such as TTAA wind data.

During the helicity summation, RAOB calculates three s-rH values based on the following inflow layers:
0-3 km, 0-2 km, and 0-1 km layers. During summation through the inflow layers, both positive and
negative values are summed.
127

16.17 Turbulence.

Clear Air Turbulence (CAT). CAT can be derived by one of two different criteria. RAOB refers to these
two criteria as the FAA and USAF methodologies, which can be specified during program configuration.

The FAA criteria are based on a July 1967 meeting of the Sub-committee/AMS as reflected in the WSOM
and AIM. These criteria are a function of wind shear as follows:

Intensity Vertical Shear (kts/1000ft)

LGT = Light 3-5
MDT = Moderate 6-9
SVR = Severe 10 - 14
XTR = Extreme* > 15*

* NOTE: The available FAA references do not specify the vertical shear criteria for the "XTR" category,
but list the SVR intensity as > 10 kts/1000ft. The author has taken the liberty to identify shear criteria for
the XTR category only to better differentiate (and graphically visualize) high-end wind shears.

The USAF criteria are based on Air Weather Service studies as reflected in AFGWC/TN 79/001 and are
derived from an empirical relationship correlating turbulence intensity to both wind shear and wind speed.
Since the original study only produces turbulence intensities when wind speeds are greater than or equal
to 40 knots, the author took the liberty to extrapolate matrix correlations to lower wind speeds, thereby
resulting in respectively lower turbulence intensities. Results of this extrapolation are consistent with the
FAA criteria, which indicate turbulence with respect to smaller wind shears. All USAF CAT intensities
produced by RAOB are with respect to 'light' aircraft, whereas heavier aircraft are generally less sensitive
to turbulence. Output is displayed via the following intensity categories:

LGT = Light SVR = Severe

L-M = Light to Moderate S-X = Severe to Extreme
MDT = Moderate XTR = Extreme
M-S = Moderate to Severe

All CAT probabilities are derived from limited studies correlating the Richardson Number (Ri) to reported
turbulence. Probabilities are determined from a linear relationships from these boundary conditions:

Probability = 100% if Ri < 0.25 Probability = 0% if Ri > 10.25

High Level Turbulence (High CAT)). High CAT (or dynamic turbulence) analyses differ from standard
CAT analyses (as described next) in two ways. High CAT is only calculated above the tropopause and is
only a function of lapse rates and not wind shears. Sinclair and Kuhn developed an empirical equation, as
described in their 1991 article “Infrared Detection of High Altitude Clear Air Turbulence,” to predict high
level turbulence using only temperature profiles. This equation defines a non-dimensional CAT predictor
called SLAT, or “S” Layer Advance Turbulence (warning) factor, which is defined as:

SLAT = [γML – (γT + γB)] [20,000ft - ∆z] / [10°C - ∆TNET]

Where: γ define lapse rates and subscripts ML, T, and B refer to mixing-layer, top, and bottom.

The term “S” layer is derived from the prime lapse rate configuration that produces CAT, which, when
present, resembles an “S” in the sounding profile. This condition exists when two inversion layers are
separated by a non-inversion layer. Layer depths and lapse rate slopes are critical to SLAT results. The
High CAT algorithms used by RAOB were provided by a US government customer.

Thermal Turbulence (THRML). All thermal turbulence is assumed to be of Light intensity. Its depth is
determined to exist between the surface and the height where the environmental potential temperature
equals the surface potential temperature.
128

17. SOUNDINGRAM.

This is the optional Standard Sounding module, unless otherwise discussed.

17.1 Soundingram Screen.

The RAOB Soundingram is composed of ordinary X-Y graphs with orthogonal coordinates (similar to the
Emagram sounding diagram). The special feature of the Soundingram is its ability to plot sounding
parameters that are continuous in nature. Whereas RAOB's "Sounding diagram" only plots temperature
and dewpoint, the "Soundingram" can also plot potential temperature, wind speed, ozone, and many other
parameters. The Soundingram’s toolbar is used to select which parameters are displayed.

As with all RAOB diagrams, the Soundingram is fully user-configurable. Additionally, all parameter scaling
is automatic; and when multiple parameters are displayed, similar scale units are merged for improved
display appearance. In order to minimize the clutter from coordinate scaling grids and associated labels, a
maximum of 3 parameters can be plotted on any one Soundingram. Another feature is the option for dual-
panel displays and the ability to plot parameters from four different soundings for detailed comparisons.

The above example Soundingram compares potential temperature plots from two different soundings. Up
to 3 parameters can be plotted on each graph. The profile color and thickness of each plotted sounding
parameter can be individually configured. The wind plots (displayed along the right-sides of each graph)
also have configurable options.

The following pages provide additional Soundingram examples and configuration options.
129

17.2 Soundingram Configuration.

The Soundingram’s configuration

options are accessed from the
Options menu as shown left.

TAB 1 (left) allows selection of up

TAB 1 – Format. to four soundings, and displays
using 1, 2, or 3 diagram panels.
(The 3-panel option requires the
Advanced Soundingram module,
where the "not used" tab then
becomes active.)

Using the format options as

selected on the example Tab 1,
which reflects a two panel display
with two soundings, the “Data
mode” display option is selected
which allows a unique method of
data comparison. An example
soundingram display is shown
below. Here the left panel displays
the potential temperature of two
soundings while the right panel
displays the relative humidity.
130

Soundingram Configuration (continued).

Similar to the Sounding diagram's “Scanner” mode, the Soundingram display also has a Soundingram
Scanner mode. This mode can be activated by selecting the “Multi-sounding scanner” option, as seen in
the image below. The scanner mode is only possible when using the “One panel display” format.

The below scanner mode example shows a simultaneous plot of 69 soundings from across the United
States from a single synoptic time. In this particular case, the soundings’ Wind Speed (kts) is plotted on
the soundingram. In this example, the wind speed plot from the Peoria sounding is highlighted in a thick
blue color. Its relative position is shown on the scroll bar at the bottom, which can be moved by the
mouse or by the keyboard’s cursor keys.
131

Soundingram Configuration (continued).

TAB 2 – Panel 1.

Panel 1. Options include the

selection of the “upper millibar
limit”, similar to options
available on most other RAOB
diagrams.

The Y-axes options control left

and right side diagram
scaling, including grid options.
The “Height Mode” option is
only available when one
sounding is being analyzed.

The X-axes option will only

draw vertical grid lines for the
st
1 data parameter analyzed.
Otherwise, there would be too
much grid clutter with multiple
sets of lines.

TAB 3 – Panel 2.

Panel 2. This is only available

when the user selects the two-
panel display option on the
Format tab. The “upper mb
limit” is only set from the
Panel 1 options tab.

The Y-axes options function in

the same manner as those
available on the Panel 1 tab.

Height-mode and grid lines

are also set from Panel 1 tab.

It is sometimes useful to
experiment with one or two
panel displays to see which
provides the best method for
data comparisons.

NOTE: The "2 Sounding display mode" option is only available with the optional Advanced Soundingram
module, which is discussed on the page after next.
132

Soundingram Configuration (continued).

Data Tab. This tab offers

control over data units and
X-axes grid labels.

The X-axes grid options

nd rd
control where the 2 and 3
data labels are placed on the
diagram. Analysis #1 is
always placed at the bottom.
Selection of the Analysis #2
parameter also controls the
rd
3 parameter label. The
“Consolidate scale” option
only applies to analyses with
the same data units.

Below is an example
soundingram comparing 3
analyses, where the vertical
st
grid (lines) reflects the 1
parameter - Temperature.
133

17.3 Advanced Soundingram.

In addition to all the features associated with the Standard Soundingram module, the Advanced module
has 4 additional features:

1 - Display 3 diagram panels.

2 - Parameter "Autoscale" option.
3 - Produce a "Difference" diagram.
4 - Includes Batch & Timer functions.

Advanced feature #1. The Soundingram display can display 3 panels of diagram analyses (as seen
below). This option requires use of a wide-screen monitor.

Advanced feature #2. Each analysis parameter can be individually configured for diagram Auto-scaling
(as seen below). If "Autoscale" is unchecked, the diagram's Max and Min boundaries can be manually set
by the user. Note: Autoscale is the default option.
134

Advanced feature #3. This module can produce a special "difference" diagram, thereby graphically
showing the variations between 2 plotted sounding profiles (see below example). The left panel plots the
actual sounding data, while the right panel depicts the "difference" (or delta) profile.

Advanced feature #4. This module also has Batch & Timer functions for fully automated RAOB use,
including a special "Batch Load" menu system which allows fully automated script operations.
135

18. CROSS-SECTIONS.

18.1 Cross-Section Screen.

The vertical cross-sections screen (both time-based and distance-based) is only available with the
optional Cross-Section Modules. Most features discussed here are available with the Standard Cross-
Section module. The Advanced Cross-Section module (discussed later in this section) contains several
additional features

The Standard Cross-Section can process up to 100 soundings per diagram. The Advanced Cross-
Section can process up to 6,000 soundings, with many more display options (as described later).

When a cross-section is generated, RAOB saves all data associated with the source soundings, that were
used to create the cross-section, into a working file called a “dataset”. These datasets can be easily
recalled for later display and analyses. They can be shared with others. These datasets can also be
edited as needed. Note: Each "dataset" also contains all calculated parameters and indices, which means
any future changes to RAOB configuration options (such as lifting or shear depth options) will not affect
data saved to the "dataset" file. The dataset contents are static. However, this module does provide a
multitude of display and analysis options, which are all configurable.

The above example “distance-based” cross-section is composed of 7 soundings. This example shows
analyses for temperature and wind speed up to the 100 millibar (hPa) level. The wind barbs and wind
legend are diagram options. Terrain is shaded in a tan color. When the cursor passes over a sounding’s
vertical reference line, a different “hand” mouse icon appears, upon which the user can then click the
“hand” icon to display a mini-sounding graphic overlay of the highlighted sounding. This mini-sounding
can then be further clicked to expand into a full-sized sounding screen. Analyses above 100 mb are
available when the RAOB program has the optional High-Altitude module.
136

18.2 Cross-Section File Menu.

The Cross-Section “Create” and “Open”

functions are discussed further below.

Similar to the File Menu options available

to the plotted SOUNDING screen, the
“Auto-Load This Cross-Section” option
allows the user to identify a particular
cross-section (dataset) which will
automatically be loaded and plotted upon
the next activation of the RAOB program.
In this way, RAOB’s Cross-Section mode
can be used as the default initial display
screen.

Auto-Update an Existing Cross-Section. When selected, RAOB will automatically update both distance-
based and time-based cross-sections. Auto-Update will locate the files containing the original soundings
that created the cross-section, and then reload the soundings from files having the original filenames. The
update will only succeed if the original filenames and file locations are the same. Time-based cross-
sections can only be automatically updated if the sounding files originate from single source datafiles ...
those which contain multiple soundings, such as BUFKIT, MAPS, or NOAA Forecast files. The datafiles
must contain new date/time sounding data, or the cross-section's appearance will remain unchanged as
the sounding data would be no different than originally processed.

Batch-Load Configuration Options. This “Advanced” Cross-Section module function is discussed in the
next section of this chapter.

18.3 Cross-Section Creation. To create a new cross-section, select the Create a New Cross-Section
menu option. A cross-section editor will then appear (see below). You must first decide whether you want
to create a time-based or distance-based cross-section. Time-based cross-sections (also called time-
height diagrams) contain soundings from the same location (identical coordinates), while distance-based
cross-sections must contain soundings from different locations. Once the “type” of cross-section is
selected, then click on the “Click after diagram type is selected” button to activate the cross-section editor
(see next page).

If the “Time Cross-Section” option is selected, an optional processing button called “Quick load entire DTG
enabled file” option is presented. When activated, RAOB will automatically create a time-height diagram
from all soundings found in multi-sounding file containing time series soundings. However, each sounding
must contain sufficient Date/Time (DTG) information to create a complete data/time field. An example of
a complete DTG field follows:
DTG: 2013-10-15 12:00:00
137

Cross-Section Creation (continued).

If a “Distance Cross-Section” is chosen, and a data file containing multiple soundings is selected, then the
following edit screen is displayed. Once the desired soundings are individually selected using the
checkboxes to the left of each sounding, click on the “TRANSFER” button to begin creation of the cross-
section file.

If the above data file contains numerous multiple soundings, the user can click the “FILTER is…” button to
filter soundings by either WMO Region or WMO Block as shown below. If the WMO Block filter option is
used, the user can additionally filter the data file using the “Include” or “Exclude” options. These filter
options allow the user to quickly eliminate un-needed soundings from the selection listing.
138

Cross-Section Creation (continued).

Once a time-based or distance-based cross-section is selected, the following edit screen is displayed.
This is an example of a time-based (or time-height) sectional, where all the soundings are from the same
location. Unlike distance-based cross-sections, each of the time-height soundings must be labeled with
specific time intervals. In this example, “Hours” are the desired interval, but by using the “Toggle” button,
other units (such as minutes, hours, days, weeks, months, or years) can be selected. Once soundings
are loaded into this cross-section editor, the Delete, Up, and Down buttons can be used to edit the relative
graph location or sequence of individual soundings.

The cross-section editor (shown above) can process up to 100 soundings with the Standard module and
up to 6,000 soundings with the Advanced module. It is highly recommended that cross-section dataset
files be saved to a directory separate from the individual sounding data files. Note that upon initial
program installation, RAOB automatically generates a separate default directory for cross-section files.

Use the “Save & Plot Cross-Section” button to save and display the cross-section. Once this button is
pressed, the cross-section diagram screen will be displayed with the plotted cross-section diagram.
139

18.4 Cross-Section Editing.

Once the cross-section is created and displayed, the file containing the cross-section’s data is called the
dataset file. This dataset file can be accessed by one of two methods.

Cross-Section DataSet File. This menu option displays the same cross-section editor used to create the
cross-section (as seen on the prior page). This editor allows sounding additions and removal in addition
to individual sounding position adjustments (and time scaling for time-based cross-sections).

Processed Cross-Section File. This menu option uses a text editor to display the complete contents of the
cross-section’s dataset file. This method should only be used by the more advanced RAOB users who
wish to inspect (and even edit) individual sounding data elements. Inspection of this file can assist in the
resolution of cross-section analyses problems and anomalies.

18.5 Cross-Section Display Options.

From the cross-section screen, you can easily return to the Sounding Main Diagram from the “Displays”
menu. Select Custom View to design your own diagram layouts. You can also view an area map of
Cross-Section soundings by using the Composite Sounding Map option. As described later in this
section, the Composite Sounding Map allows the generation of interpolated soundings using a 2-
dimensional map of plotted soundings from which to select the location of the interpolated sounding.
Available only with the optional Real-Time Processor module, the Real-Time Display option presents
user-configurable options for automatically detecting new sounding data, updating the displayed cross-
section, and then re-analyzing selected data fields. Real-Time processing features are discussed later.

18.6 Cross-Section Configuration.

Similar to the SOUNDING screen, the cross-section’s diagram (configuration) options can also be
conveniently displayed by clicking the right-mouse button while over the diagram.
140

TAB 1 – Format.
Upper hPa (or mb) Limit of Cross-Section. Use
the up/down arrow keys to select highest pressure
level. This option is identical to RAOB's Sounding
diagram options. Select Automatically select upper
limit to have RAOB automatically scale the
diagram’s upper limit. Select Manually enter upper
limit to specify a top level value (100 to 1000 mb).

Panels. Choose from 1 to 4 cross-sections. *

Widescreen. Select this option to maximize the

display area on wide-screen computer monitors.

Split Screen. Displays both a Cross-Section

diagram with a Sounding diagram. *

Weather Sym. Displays Weather Symbols below

the diagrams' X-Axis labels. Requires RICAPS, and
can only be used with single-panel displays. *

Y-axes. Select hPa (or mb), km, or ft for the vertical

scales for the Left & Right sides of the diagram.
Check the Draw grid box to draw horizontal lines
across the diagram. Use the Merge Y-axes with
diagram walls to co-located y-axes with diagram
walls and force wind barbs inside diagram walls.
The horizontal cursor option only functions with
single-panel diagrams. When distance-based
cross-sections are displayed, only the MSL mode is
used because of different sounding site elevations.
See next page for additional information.
* Requires the Advanced Cross-Section module.

The below example image shows the “Draw vertical line to identify horizontal position” option which
has a thick black line to illustrate the horizontal position of each diagram sounding. When this option is
used, and the mouse passes over the KOVN line, the KOVN station’s identification information is
displayed below the cross-section in dark red as indicated by the bold curved line below.
141

TAB 1 – Format (continued) …

The Format Tab is again shown below, but this time reflecting the two different sets of options associated
with the X-Axes. The left set of options appear when a Distance-Based diagram is plotted, while the right
set of options appear when a Time-Based diagram is plotted.

X-axes (for distance-based diagram). X-axes (for time-based diagram).

Select Labels and Distances options. Select the Labels and Time Interval options
desired for display.
If either WMO or ICAO labels are selected
and either of these identifiers is not available The Filename label option is most useful for
for a particular station, then no information cross-sections generated from sounding
will be displayed. However, this information files with unique filenames. The Time
can be manually entered (or changed) via the Interval option can be used to quickly
Edit menu option for the Processed Cross- reverse the sequence of all soundings
Section File. The MSL / AGL height mode without having to manually edit sequences
option is only available when using Time- via the Edit menu option for the Cross-
based diagrams. Section Data File.
142

TAB 2 – Data.

Temperature and PT/ePT. Select either Celsius or Fahrenheit units for contour (isopleth) labels. (Note:
ePT = equivalent PT). Water & Hail. Select either inches (in) or centimeters (cm).

Wind Options.

Display wind plots. Check this box to

graphically display sounding wind data.

Multi-panel wind plot displays. Specify which

panels contain wind plot data.

Display. Select Shafts with Feathers, Variable

Shafts, or Vector winds.

Print graphic wind legend. The legend

appears at the lower-right diagram margin.

Units. Select kts, m/s, or mph.

Color. Select Black, Grey, or Colorize winds.

The colorize option requires the Advanced
Cross-Section program module.

Size. Select: Big, Medium, or Small winds.

Wind plot display interval.

This option allows thinning of displayed wind
data, which is especially useful for cross-
sections containing many soundings.

The example image at

left shows a time-
series diagram which
has its wind data
plotted with the
“Shafts with Feathers”
option.

Additionally, the “Print

graphic wind legend”
option is used, which
displays the legend at
the lower-right corner,
below the diagram.
143

TAB 3 – Analyses.

Colorize. Select this option to paint the first cross-

section parameter analysis in full color. Follow-on
analyses are then overlaid as contour lines. *

Gradient Editor. Activates color Editor menus. *

Select desired "grid line" and "crop analyses"

colorizing options.

Colorbar orientation for single panel diagram.

Select the Horizontal or Vertical style. *

Contour Labels. For diagram contour labels.

Legend of data contours. The legend is displayed

within the cross-section diagram.

Legend of Label abbreviations of data categories.

Legend information is only used for non-numeric
labels, such as “OVC = Overcast”

Grid matrix resolution. Select larger values to help

analyze finer details in contour gradients.

Analysis smoothing passes. Helps eliminate rough

* Options require the Advanced Module. looking analyses especially when using higher grid
matrix resolutions, or irregularly spaced data sets.

TAB 4 – Labels.

Check the Apply standard DTG notation to

x-axis labels checkbox for a more traditional
date & time display format. The DTG data
must be available in the sounding’s
“information” text.

DTG = Date Time Group

1. The DTG data must be preceded by one of

the following two DTG indicators…

DTG:
Date/Time:

2. The user must select the DTG format that

is reflected in the sounding’s text.

Logo display. Select Logo placement at the

screen’s upper-right corner, or within the
diagram’s lower-left corner.
144

18.7 Cross-Section Mouse & Click Operations.

Mini-Sounding. While moving the mouse over the cross-section, the mouse-pointer will change shape into
a "hand" image, which when clicked, will produce a mini-sounding of that data (see below example). This
mini-sounding can be expanded into a full sized sounding by clicking the small “expand box” icon, which is
located in the upper-right corner of the mini-sounding.

Title. The cross-section's Title can be edited with a mouse-click when over the title text.

X-Axis. The cross-section's x-axis Label can be edited with a mouse-click when over the label's text area.

Zoom. When using the optional Advanced Cross-Section module (discussed in the next few pages), the
"rubber-band-zoom" mode is activated with a CTRL-Click of the mouse.

Data Plots. When viewing a plotted cross-section diagram, and while the Toolbar is displayed, click on
any Toolbar button while pressing down the SHIFT or CTRL key – and the actual data values will appear
on the diagram. This option is often used in the classroom, so students can manually analyze a cross-
section or time-height diagram.
145

18.8 Cross-Section Analyses. The Menu's ANALYZE option displays a floating toolbar (similar to the
Sounding diagram toolbar) from which several analyses options can be toggled on/off. This toolbar can
also be activated by pressing the right mouse button while over the area to the left of the diagram (just like
for the Sounding diagrams). Each of the toolbar’s dual-column buttons are explained on the following
pages.

The Cross-Section’s toolbar buttons function similar to the

Sounding diagram's toolbar. However, they also have
additional functionality as explained here:

Contour Mode (non-painted).

Left-click (1st instance): Draws data contours with labels.

Left-click (2nd instance): Removes data contours and labels.

Painted Mode (colorized) – for Advanced Cross-Section.

Left-click (1st instance): Paints diagram according to the

selected color gradient option.

Left-click (2nd instance): Overlays contour analyses over the

st
painted diagram analysis of the 1 instance.

Left-click (3rd instance): Removes painted and contour

analyses.

Any mode.

Right-click: Displays data configuration options panel. See the

next four pages for further information and examples.

CTRL-click: Prints actual data values onto the diagram screen.

When printed on paper, this option allows manual analyses of
the cross-section diagram, which is very useful for educational
purposes.
146

Unique to the Cross-Section’s toolbar is its dual-column display. For descriptive purposes, this display is
split into two separate sections – the left-column being displayed on this page and the right-column being
displayed on the next page.

Temperature (°C or °F)

Potential Temperature [Theta] (°K)
Equivalent Potential Temperature [Theta-e] (°K)
Equivalent Potential Temperature wrt Ice [Theta-e(i)] (°K)
Virtual Temperature (°C or °F)
Virtual Potential Temperature (°K)
WetBulb Temperature (°C or °F)
Dewpoint Temperature (°C or °F)
Dewpoint Depression (°C or °F)
Relative Humidity wrt Water (%)
Relative Humidity wrt Ice (%)
Mixing Ratio (g/Kg)
Precip. Water (precipitable water) (in. or cm.)
3
Cloud Water Content (g/m ) *
3
Density (kg/m )
D-Value (ISA standard atmosphere height deviation) (m)
Wind Speed (kt or m/s)
Cross-Wind Speed (kt or m/s)
U-Component of the Wind Speed (kt or m/s)
V-Component of the Wind Speed (kt or m/s)
W-Component (vertical) of the Wind Speed (kt or m/s)
Wind Shear (kts/1000ft)

The following options are only available with the Analytic Module.

Hi-CAT High-altitude turbulence categories

CAT Clear-Air Turbulence categories *
Wave CAT categories. Only with the Mountain Wave Module. *
LLWS : Low Level Wind Shear
Cloud Layers categories
ICE Structural icing categories *
Carburetor Icing (induction) categories

More >> This button expands the toolbar to display the more analysis options.

* NOTE: These parameters (LWC, CAT, icing, ducting, etc.) are solely determined by
the configuration settings in effect at the time which the cross-section datafile was
created.
147

This is the right-column display of the cross-section’s toolbar. This toolbar panel also offers the ozone
and omega (if data are available) and radiometric (radiometer data) buttons for analyses.

CAPE* Convective Available Potential Energy (J/kg)

Potential Instability (Theta-e gradients, C/km)
Potential Vorticity (PVU)
Richardson Number (Ri)
Omega (vertical motion) (microbars/second)
Ozone {if present} (nbar, mPa, or ppb)
Liquid Water (radiometric data)
Vapor Density (radiometric data)
Abs. (Absolute) Humidity
Inversions (frontal & subsidence)
Fog (radiation & advection)
Fronts (cold & warm)

Refractivity (N-units or K-units)

Ducting (trapping) potential
Lightning potential
Contrails potential
Thermal Index

SNR (signal to noise ratio)

Doppler units

The following analyses are displayed as a single line depicting parameter height.
Tropopause
CCL / LFC / LCL
Mixing Height
Pres Lvl Heights – Plots heights of standard pressure levels (100 mb, 200 mb,
etc.). See example in the following pages.

Meteogram – select from a variety of parameters for overlay displays. See

example in the following pages.

The Extra#1, Extra#2, and Extra#3 analyses buttons become active when one or
more data types are included as data items, either from Aerosol profile data, or
from sounding files created in the RAOB CSV data format. The CSV format can
be used to analyze any user-defined data items. The CSV Format is described
at the end of this User Manual.

* Examples of CAPE analyses can be found in the next few pages.

Each toolbar analysis button has configurable options. These options can be displayed by right-clicking
on each button (see next page for example).
148

Standard Cross-Section Data Analysis Options.

Below is an example of the “Temperature” configuration options panel. Each panel is displayed after right-
clicking the mouse over the toolbar’s parameter button. For this example, the temperature’s contour
interval, color, and line style can be altered. Additionally, for those data items that can have a zero (0)
value (e.g., temperature, wet-bulb temperature, D-Val, and cross-winds); the zero value line can be
plotted thicker for enhanced visualization of the contour patterns.

The below-left shows the “Color” options panel which is displayed upon selecting the above “Change Line
Color” button. The below-right image is another Temperature analysis options box, but this one shows
additional line options, which become available upon selecting the above “Change Line Style & Thickness”
button.
149

Advanced Cross-Section Data Analysis Options.

The prior page shows how the Temperature analysis options box appears when RAOB is configured to
only display isopleth analyses, or when only the Standard Cross-Section module is available. When using
the optional Advanced Cross-Section module (or enabling analysis colorizing), the below Temperature
analysis box is displayed. This analysis options box is now expanded to the right with a Gradient (or
colorizing) option. It shows the current Gradient selected for analysis, and it provides a “Change Gradient”
button which allows the user to change the color Gradient.

When the “Change Gradient” button is selected, the below Gradient Editor is displayed. Here the user can
either select a different Gradient for analysis, or the user can create a new and unique gradient. Please
see the following pages on the Advanced Cross-Section module, which provides additional explanation
and discussion about this full-featured Gradient Editor.
150

Pressure Heights. This option plots the "heights" of the standard pressure levels. Below shows how to
select and configure a pressure level for overlay. First right click on the “Pres Lvl Heights” button. Then
select which standard pressure level to plot. Each level can be configured for color and line thickness. To
do this, just click on the small square buttons just left of the pressure level check boxes as shown below

This example sectional overlays the 500 mb heights over the "Clouds" analysis. Note that the “colorized”
CAT analyses can only be done with the Advanced Cross-Section module.
151

Meteogram Options. Below is an illustration of how to select and configure a specific meteogram
parameter for a cross-section or time-height overlay. The user must first right click on the “Meteogram”
button to select which parameters to plot. Each parameter can be individually configured for color and line
thickness. To do this, just click on the small square buttons just left of the meteogram parameter check
boxes as shown below.

This example cross-section overlays three meteogram parameters over the "CAPE" analysis field.
Note that the “colorized” CAPE analyses can only be done with the Advanced Cross-Section module.
152

18.9 Interpolation of a Cross-Section Sounding.

Click on the menu bar’s INTERPOLATE option to

activate the sounding generation (or interpolation)
feature. Upon activation, a blinking vertical line
and associated horizontal scroll bar is displayed.
The coordinates of the pending interpolated
sounding are displayed just below the scroll bar.
Once the blinking line is positioned at the desired
location (in space or time), just click on the
“Interpolate New Sounding” button to begin the
interpolation process. To exit the interpolation
mode, just click on the “Resume” menu option or
press the ESC key.

RAOB automatically determines the new station

elevation and latitude & longitude coordinates (for
distance-based cross-sections), then adds this
information to the new sounding.

All significant temperature data are maintained in

the interpolated sounding. Additionally, standard
significant pressure levels (i.e., 1000, 850, etc.)
are added to the interpolated sounding, if
missing.

All significant wind data are also maintained in

the interpolated sounding. However, if the
interpolated sounding has less than 4 winds, then
RAOB automatically interpolates wind data at
2,000 foot intervals, MSL.

Note: For distance-based cross-sections (such

as this example) where surface elevations differ,
RAOB employs additional interpolation algorithms
in order to generate a representative “surface
boundary layer” which maintains similar low-level
temperature and wind gradients. In some cases
with very steep surface terrain differences, this
additional interpolation may not produce a
reasonable profile and manual adjustments may
be necessary, especially if the user is primarily
interested in surface or boundary related data
analyses.
153

Sounding Interpolation (continued).

After the “Interpolate New Sounding” button is pressed and RAOB completes the interpolation process,
the following screens appear. First, an overlaid mini-sounding screen presents a plot of the newly created
sounding. Second, alongside the mini-sounding is a prompt which asks the user to save or cancel the
new sounding.

Once the new sounding

is accepted and given a
file name, the user is
then prompted to enter
an optional “description”
line, which will be
included in the newly
created sounding file.
RAOB automatically
adds a date & time entry
for the “description,”
which can be edited now
or at a later time.
154

Sounding Interpolation (continued).

After the newly created sounding has been given a file name and optional file
description, the sounding can be easily expanded and transferred to the
Sounding diagram screen as a full-sized diagram by clicking on the 4-arrow
expansion icon located at the upper-right corner of the mini-sounding.

Sounding Interpolation Limitations.

Data Coordinate Limitations.

Coordinates between any two consecutive soundings must be less than or equal to 90 degrees.
Distances greater than 90 degrees will cause unpredictable results.

Data Analysis Limitations and Suggestions.

Due to the great variety of data types that may be analyzed, cross-section algorithms were chosen to best
fit common data resolutions and the use of relatively low grid resolution to increase processing speed. In
the more unusual cases where data gradients are very small compared to the diagram grid, the user can
alter three program options to better see the analysis…

1. Decrease the ‘smoothing’ passes as much as possible (Diagram Options, Tab 3). This helps see the
finer details of data patterns. However, if the data gradients are very tight, then irregular isopleth patterns
may occur.

2. Lower the upper pressure level of the cross-section diagram (Diagram Options, Tab 1). This has the
affect of vertically expanding the diagram’s lower layers and effectively increasing the grid resolution of the
low-level analyses.

3. Increase the grid matrix resolution (Diagram Options, Tab 3). This will allow higher resolution analyses
and will result in better definition of data with strong gradients. This option will require more computer
processing speed. This option may also produce irregular isopleth patterns, which may need more
smoothing to improve appearance.

Sounding Interpolation Limitations.

If generated winds are interpolated from 2 opposing wind directions, the result may not be of the desired
orientation, but will instead be 180 degrees out. In these instances, the wind directions must be manually
adjusted by editing the sounding data via the “Sounding” display screen data editing options.
155

18.10 Composite Sounding Map.

Below is a Composite Map screen example, which can be toggled on/off with the TAB key.

The Composite Map allows alternative methods of generating an interpolated sounding. Instead of
performing the standard distance-based or time-based cross-section interpolation, this screen allows
either distance weighting or equal averaging of all selected soundings. This is especially useful for points
of interest that do not lie between any pair of soundings. In other words, this screen will allow the user to
generate a sounding for any location in the region of the cross-section. However, the accuracy of the
resulting sounding is bounded by the proximity (locations and distances) of surrounding soundings.

The Composite Map shows the relative positions of each sounding. By using the cursor keys or mouse, a
blinking cross-hair icon can be moved within the map area. The position of the cross-hair determines the
coordinates of the resulting interpolated sounding. The new sounding is then generated by one of two
processing options, distance or equal weighting. These options are presented next.
156

Composite-Map (continued).

When the cross-hair icon is positioned at the desired location, then click on the INTERPOLATE Menu to
display two interpolation options as seen here…

Distance Weighted. Activation of the Distance Weighted option will

produce a sounding as a function of the distance of plotted
soundings with respect to the location of the cross-hair icon. Before
processing begins, the user will be asked to specify an elevation for
the interpolated sounding or accept the computer’s interpolated
elevation. (See example of a Distance Weighted interpolation
prompt screen at right.)

Equally Averaged. Activation of the Equally Averaged option will

produce a sounding based on equal weighting of all plotted
soundings regardless of the location of the cross-hair icon. Like the
above Interpolation option, the user will also be prompted to specify
an elevation for the averaged sounding or accept the computer’s
averaged elevation.

Upon activation of the INTERPOLATE SOUNDING button (seen at

right), the same interpolation sequence of sounding display and file
identification is presented as occurs during the interpolation process
associated with the main cross-section screen.

Composite-Map Interpolation Limitations.

Data Coordinate Limitations.

Coordinates between any two consecutive soundings must be less than or equal to 90 degrees.
Distances greater than 90 degrees will cause unpredictable results.

Sounding Interpolation Limitations.

If generated winds are interpolated from 2 opposing wind directions, the result may not be of the desired
orientation, but will instead be 180 degrees out. In these instances, the wind directions can be easily
modified by using the editing capabilities of the full screen mode display of the interpolated sounding.
157

18.11 Advanced Cross-Section Module. RAOB’s Advanced Cross-Section module contains all the
features of the Standard Cross-Section module plus the following additional features ...

1 – Maximum of 6,000 soundings.

2 – Display up to 4 panels on the same display.
3 – Zoom diagram capabilities.
4 – Compare two different cross-section or time-height files.
5 – Batch generation of time-height diagrams.
6 – Colorizing.
7 – Weather Symbols.
8 – Split Screen.

Advanced feature #1: 6,000 Soundings. Whereas the Standard module has an upper limit of 100
soundings per cross-section, the “Advanced” module allows up to 6,000 soundings per cross-section.
This is especially useful for detailed studies of time-series sections where sounding data is produced by
surface-based sounding systems with very high temporal resolutions.

Advanced feature #2. 1-4 Panels.

Plot one, two, three or four diagram panels on the

computer’s display screen at the same time.

Use the Panels selector shown at left to select

desired number of panels. Select the Widescreen
option to maximize diagram size.

The image at left contains

an example 3-panel cross-
section. Each panel can be
individually selected for
different analyses and
meteogram overlays.

Although not shown in the

example, overlays of data
isopleths with labels can
also be added to these
diagrams.

Advanced feature #3. Zoom. After a cross-section diagram is plotted, the Zoom function is activated
using the CTRL key and Mouse clicks …

ZOOM-IN -- Press the CTRL key during MOUSE click & drag action.
ZOOM-OUT -- Click the RESTORE option located on the menu bar.
158

Advanced feature #4. Compare. This function permits the display of 2 different cross-section and/or
time-height diagrams simultaneously. The Upper/Lower diagrams are individually selected as seen below.

Advanced feature #5. Batch generation of Time-Height diagrams. Selection of the FILE menu’s
“Batch-Load Configuration Options” (as seen below) presents the main control panel enabling batch
processing of time-height diagrams. RAOB will be ready to process a batch command after activation of
the “Save current Diagram, Toolbar/Analyses, Image Capture, and Data Export settings” command
button. This command button not only saves the Image & Export options, but also the currently active
Diagram display format and the analyses Toolbar selections, which will all be reproduced during the batch.

The light yellow box in the above panel of Batch options presents the Batch Format. Below is an example
of a complete batch command. The “Config#” parameter (Config1 through Config8) is optional.

C:\Program Files\RAOB Program\RAOB.EXE Time-Section,Config1,D:\Data\Data.txt

Note that one wildcard asterisk (*) can be used in the Filename, where the most recent file will be used.

There is one other batch command option that applies to the unique sounding files in the Radiometrics
(RDX) format, where the files can contain multiple scan modes. In these cases, the desired scan mode
must be specified at the end of the batch command (as seen below) or else the first scan mode found will
be used. Note: there is one exception to this RDX rule – if the RAOB Program configuration options panel
(access via F9), the Data Processing tab’s “Pre-select a scan mode…” option is used, then this pre-
selected scan mode will override any batch command settings.

Example RDX command line > RAOB.EXE Time-Section,D:\RDXdata.CSV,Angle Scan18(A)

Once the Batch Load options are set and the batch command line is established, there is one final
requirement for successful time-height diagram generation. All the soundings in the multi-sounding
datafile must have sufficient data/time (DTG) information for RAOB to create the necessary DTG field
which is used to properly locate the soundings on the time-height diagram

Note: The “Data Export” function requires use of the optional Advanced Export module.
159

Advanced feature #6. Colorizing.

st
By checking the Colorize 1 analysis
with spectrum colors box, the user
can apply colored analyses to most
toolbar parameters. Further analyses
of the same parameter will be applied
to the diagram as overlays of isopleths.

The Color Gradient Editor is discussed

in the next section of this manual.

At left is an example
of a colorized CAPE
analysis (including an
isopleth overlay of the
LFC analysis). For
those viewing this
example in black &
white, the CAPE+
areas are located
above the LFC line
(and are colored red)
while the CAPE-
areas are located
below the LFC line
(and are colored
blue).

At left is an example single

panel display of colorized
winds.

The colorbar is displayed

along the right side of the
diagram. There is an
option to display the
colorbar at the top of the
diagram. This menu option
can be seen at the top of
this page.

The winds colorizing option

is located on the Data Tab
of the Cross-Section
Options.
160

Advanced feature #7. Weather Symbols.

At left is an example time-height diagram

with the "Weather Symbol" option
activated.

This option is only available when

displaying a single-panel sectional.

When activated, it displays standard

WMO weather symbols immediately
below the respective weather producing
profile.

To ensure maximum display of weather

information, RAOB creates up to 3 lines
of weather symbols.

Not shown in the adjacent image, is the

time-height diagram's "timeline", which is
always displayed immediately below the
weather symbol section.

Weather Symbols example.

Advanced feature #8. Split Screen.

RAOB's unique "Split Screen" option requires use of a wide-screen monitor. While the above display
shows a single-panel sectional, it can also work with multi-panel (2-4) displays. The left side Sectional
and the right side Sounding (SkewT or Emagram) diagrams are independently configurable. Whenever
the mouse cursor (or arrow keys) move across the Sectional diagram, RAOB instantly updates the
associated Sounding diagram. The Sounding diagram also has analyses and other display options.
161

18.12 Gradient Editor.

rd
RAOB's Gradient Editor is accessed by one of 2 methods. (1). From the 3 (Analyses) tab of the cross-
section’s diagram options screen. (2). From the cross-section’s Analyses Toolbar, by right-clicking on the
parameter of interest. Only from this second access method does the “Apply” button become functional.

The above gradient editor example displays the preset color scheme for “Default” analyses (mainly used
for temperature & moisture fields). The top drop-down box lists all available saved gradients. The Preset
gradients (those with a "P_" prefix) can not be added, edited, or deleted, but user-defined gradients can be
added and deleted. Once a gradient is selected, it is placed in the "Gradient Colors" section for editing.

Colorband Pens. These pens are located above the gradient edit box.

- Drag the pen left & right to adjust widths of colorbands.

The “Evenly space colorbands” button resets all pens.
- Right-click the pen to change the color.
- Click on the Eraser to remove the color from the gradient.

Mid-Point Pens. These pens are located below the gradient edit box.

- Drag the pen left & right to adjust colorband mid-points.

The “Evenly space mid-points” button resets all pens.
- Right-click the pen to flip colorband colors.

New Gradient. To create a new gradient…

- Click on the “New” button.

- Click on the “Add a Color” button for each new color.
- Click on the “Save As” button to save the gradient for diagram analyses.
- Click on the “Apply” button to link a gradient to a specific toolbar parameter.
162

Gradient Editor Tools.

Gradient Type. The example gradient on the prior page shows a “Smooth” gradient.

At left is an example
gradient with the “Step”
option applied, which is
set to “2” steps per
colorband. Increase the
number of Steps to
produce smoother color
transitions between steps.
Note that the color pens
are removed in the “step”
mode and all colorbands
are evenly spaced.

Gradient Scaling. The first example below contains the same gradient as above, but with 3 Steps per
colorband with the addition of “Manual” Gradient Scaling. This scaling scheme could be used, for
example, for analyses of temperatures using Celsius units.

If this scaling is used, any

diagram temperatures falling
outside the scale’s max/min
limits will not be analyzed
(colored) and will be left blank.
If the “Automatic” scaling mode is
used, the entire diagram will be
analyzed and the colored step
pattern will not necessarily
coincide with overlaid isopleths
due to data smoothing
differences.

The second example (shown at

left) uses the same gradient, but
with the “Smooth” color mode,
which allows the user to
manually adjust the gradient
using the color pens.

Auto-balance Max/Min limits. The auto-balance option can not be changed for Preset (P_) gradients.
When checked, RAOB will automatically find the higher "absolute" value of the max and min values, and
force the lesser value equal to the higher value -- and of the opposite sign.
163

Gradient Editor Tools (continued).

^
Logarithmic scale. Below the Gradient Scaling's "Manual" option, there is the special "Logarithmic scale"
option. When selected, the "Interval" option is no longer needed and becomes disabled. The "Max" value
is automatically set to the number one or ten (1 or 10). The "Min" value can be any one of the following
values:

0.1
0.01
0.001
0.0001
164

18.13 Real-Time Display – An Automated Cross-Section Data Processor Module. This is an optional
program module for which the Advanced Cross-Section module is a prerequisite. This module is only
used for Time-Sections. When activated, RAOB uses timed intervals to search for new sounding data,
and if found, automatically adds the new soundings to the existing cross-section diagram.

Location. The Real-Time Display Options screen requires identification of sounding data location.

File Content. This drop-down box offers 2 options – (1) Single sounding data files, or (2) Multiple
sounding data files. Example discussions follow…

Single sounding data files. Any data type can be used for this option, but all sounding data filenames
must use the same name convention as defined in the File Mask box. Each sounding file must contain
only one sounding, and each filename must contain year (Y), month (M), day (D), hour (H), and minute (N)
information; while all other information is represented by the pound (#) character. Use the “Test Mask”
button to verify the existence of data using the File Mask format. Below is an example use of the mask.

Filename: 20071015_1200_RAOB.CSV
Mask: YYYYMMDD#HHNN#########
165

Multiple sounding data files. While the “single sounding” data format option allows data of any format to
be processed, this option only processes the RDX (or Radiometrics Corp) data files. These multiple
sounding files contain not only temperature and moisture data, but also liquid water and vapor density
data. Special datafile names are not required since data dates & times are embedded within the data
files. Since the RDX data files can be very large, RAOB needs extra time to process the files.

Note: Processing of RDX data requires the optional RDX Decoder program module.

Displays. Use the Displays options to specify the time period (hours & minutes) displayed on diagram.

Time Mode. Select Local or UTC (Zulu) time.

System Date/Time Base. Select the Current system for normal operational use. Use the Relative
system option to test historical or other datasets. This is done by simulating a different clock date & time,
while leaving the computer’s operational time clock unchanged. Once the real-time processor is started,
the specified Date/Time value moves forward in time.

Timer. Use the Timer options to select how often RAOB looks for new sounding data. When new data is
found, the data is processed and added to the existing cross-section. Use the Auto-start option to
automatically load the existing cross-section and continue the updates with current timer options.

Image Capture. Define how and where diagram images are stored.

Start Timer Buttons. Automatic cross-section processing is activated by either of the two “Start Time”
buttons, depending on whether a new or existing diagram is desired. Once the real-time diagram is
initiated, processed and displayed, a “Stop Timer” button appears above the diagram (see below), which
functions as a Start/Stop toggle switch to control processing.

Stop Timer. This option temporarily halts the timer.

Save Settings. This button saves all options to the programs configuration files for later recall.

Terminate real-time processing mode. This button stops the real-time updating of the cross-section
diagram, which then makes available other cross-section options which were previously disabled.
166

Real-Time Display: Weather Alerts. Any alerts listed in the Weather Alerts window will automatically be
checked against the last (or right-most) sounding plotted during real-time updates. Use the “Alert Editor”
button to modify the alert list.

Below is an example of a “Delta ePT” alert notification during a real-time updated time-section. The pop-
up alert box remains displayed until the user acknowledges the alert. Just as with the Sounding diagram's
alert options, these alerts also have associated sound alert options.
167

19. MOUNTAIN WAVES and WAVE TURBULENCE.

19.1 Wave Turbulence Overview.

This is an optional program module.

The RAOB program is the only commercially available sounding analyses program that produces
mountain (lee) wave turbulence analyses. Even though RAOB also produces standard CAT and High
Altitude CAT analyses, these forms of turbulence only use wind shear and lapse rates (respectively) as
determining factors. Wave turbulence, however, is dependent on both wind speed, lapse-rate, and
surface terrain information. In fact, results show that just the slightest variations in surface terrain can
produce wave turbulence when the necessary wind shear and stability conditions are present – and the
RAOB program has algorithms that objectively measure their combined effect upon the atmosphere.

There are literally hundreds of published articles on various mathematical solutions for wave turbulence,
many of which have specific boundary conditions such as limited atmospheric layers or require explicit
atmospheric lapse rates, wind shears, and terrain shapes. RAOB, on the other hand, consistently
produces reasonable wave turbulence analyses using everyday soundings with user-definable mountain
parameters, and without restriction to pre-defined lapse rates or wind shear. Even though RAOB has a
default mountain range parameter algorithm, that will always produce a maximum wave scenario, it is
absolutely essential that the user provide RAOB with actual mountain parameters in order to produce the
best possible wave turbulence results for any individual sounding. This necessity is discussed in more
detail in the following pages of this section.

All mathematics used by RAOB to produce wave turbulence are taken from widely acknowledged and
quoted sources of wave turbulence theory (which are detailed in the following pages). These theories
were developed before the age of computers and no applications algorithms existed until Richard E. Cale
(an internationally recognized Certified Consulting Meteorologist) converted these equations into a
standard set of automated procedures for use on programmable calculators. Using these procedures, Mr.
Cale has had repeated success in analyzing mountain wave turbulence over the Rocky Mountains and
other worldwide locations during many years of research on numerous aviation incidents and related
atmospheric phenomena.

With Mr. Cale’s assistance, the wave turbulence algorithms were incorporated into the RAOB program in
a powerful interactive format, which dramatically increased application functionality. Test results were
remarkable as very good correlations were noted between soundings and reported wave activity. RAOB
even produced good correlation of observed low-level wave induced clouds over the mid-western United
States, where a large hill was the only significant terrain feature. The source literature used to develop
RAOB’s wave algorithms similarly reflect the sensitivity of this methodology to analyze waves produced by
even the slightest variations in terrain. Note however, that the success of these algorithms require
accurate mountain information. The user must provide the RAOB program with specific mountain
parameters for each sounding location in order to obtain the best possible mountain wave and related
turbulence results.

It is important to note that even though RAOB consistently produces reasonable wave turbulence results,
nearly all mountain and lee wave source documents indicate that there is no single set of equations that
can accurately explain all wave phenomena. Furthermore, even though RAOB uses three parameters to
define terrain (height, half-width, and ridge axis orientation), mountain shapes are much more complex
than these simple definitions may suggest. In the meantime, improved and new methods are being
sought for use in RAOB.

The mountain-wave screen also has a powerful option which produces Froude Number analyses and
graphics, which are very important to forecasting enhanced mountain precipitation and downslope winds.

For those that require a complete analysis of atmospheric turbulence (with or without local terrain
influences), RAOB’s Turbulence & Mountain-Wave module is a must-have tool.
168

19.2 Wave Turbulence Method.

There are two basic rules that must be followed in order to achieve the best possible wave turbulence
results. Any deviation to these rules will most likely result in less reliable results.

1. The sounding must be upwind of the mountain. The optimum location is at the foot (or in the
immediate upwind valley) of the mountain. If an upwind sounding is not available
and if there are sufficient adjacent soundings, then it should be possible to interpolate an
appropriate sounding using RAOB’s Merge function.

2. Specific mountain parameters must be provided. Use of RAOB’s “default” mountain

parameters are solely designed to produce the maximum potential wave scenario for the
optimum mountain shape pertaining to the analyzed sounding. Mountain definition is composed
of three parameters:

(1) Mountain height (MSL).

(2) Half-width at the mountain’s upwind mid-elevation (see figure below).
(3) Ridge axis (degrees). Use 0 (zero) degrees for conical mountains.

The above figure illustrates the optimum upwind location of the sounding and proper half-width definition
at the mountain’s mid-elevation. Note that the “mid-elevation” is defined as the height midway between
the elevation of the sounding station and the mountain top. It is also important that the elevation of the
sounding station (as listed in the RAOB.STN locator file) be accurate.
169

19.3 Mountain Wave Screen. This is only available with the optional Mountain-Wave Module.

Below is an example mountain-wave diagram. This diagram is obtained from the main Sounding Diagram
screen by pressing F5 or by selecting the DISPLAY Menu option and then the Mountain-Wave option.
The F5 function key will return the user back to the Sounding Diagram.

The Sounding’s title line and station elevation are listed above the example wave diagram. Just below are
listed the mountain elevation and related parameters, which are explained later in this section. A typical
atmospheric sounding can have none to several mountain-wave levels. This example has 2 waves, where
the predominate wave (the wave with the longest wavelength) is initially plotted by default. Located along
the top inside border of the diagram are details about the plotted wave. Parameter units for these data
items and units for the mountain characteristics are user-defined and are discussed later in this section.

Located along the left side of the diagram are two wind plots. The “Sounding Winds” reflect the winds as
reported from the sounding’s datafile. The “Normal Winds” reflect the wind components that are
perpendicular (or normal) to the mountain ridge. In this case, the mountain ridge axis was defined to be at
a 350-degree orientation. The “normal” wind is always plotted relative to the mountain axis. The “normal”
winds are always plotted as if the mountain axis has a north-south orientation, regardless of the actual
mountain.

At the bottom of the screen is a slider button which is used to move a blinking cursor-line along the
diagram as it displays downwind distances and the wave’s associated vertical velocities.
170

19.4 Mountain Wave & Froude Number Display.

The prior page describes RAOB's standard mountain wave display screen, which is available to all RAOB
program versions. The below image was created by the new Expanded display screen, which requires
use of both the optional Analytic module and a wide-screen computer monitor.

The above expanded mountain wave screen not only displays the same standard mountain-wave images
and functions, but it also displays Froude Number data. Froude Number data is important to forecasting
enhanced mountain precipitation (rain & snow), and potential for mountain-gap wind funneling and
downslope winds (such as Foehn and Chinook winds).

This screen also displays RAOB's RICAPS cloud & precipitation analyses, which is represented by the
blue region upwind (left) of the mountain. This RICAPS analysis display represents weather associated
with the analyzed sounding, which ideally is situated in a valley just upwind of the mountain. Inversions
are also plotted as horizontal green bars. The black colored wind, that is plotted mid-way up the
mountain's windward side, represents the mean normal wind, which is used to calculate the Froude
Number ...

Froude Number = U / (N x H) [uses virtual potential temperature {wet} data]

where: U = the mean normal wind between the surface and mountain peak
N = the mean Brunt-Vaisala frequency from the surface to mountain peak.
H = the height of the mountain.

Studies show that Froude Numbers less than 1 reflect blocked mountain wind flow, while numbers greater
than 1 indicate winds that flow freely over mountains, thereby increasing potential for downslope winds.
RAOB's expanded screen will display the following based on these Froude Number categories:

Froude No. Expected Wind Flow & Weather Pattern

---------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
< 0.5 Upslope clouds/precipitation backed farther upwind of and up to mountain crest.
0.5 to < 1.0 Upslope clouds/precipitation falls immediately upwind of mountain crest.
1.0 to < 2.0 Precipitation advances to mountain ridge and on to the lee side.
>= 2.0 Air flows freely over mountain crest along with scattered downwind weather.
171

19.5 Mountain-Wave Diagram Options.

Like RAOB’s other diagrams, these options are presented when selected via the Options Menu or just by
right-clicking while the mouse is located over the diagram.

Format.

Display. Select either the Standard

or Expanded display options. The
Expanded option requires use of
the optional Analytic module and a
wide-screen computer monitor.
The prior page illustrates the
Expanded display format.

Y-axes. As with the sounding

diagram, the user can select either
manual or automatic scaling.
Options exist to display left and
right height scales, including a
horizontal grid option for the left
scale.

X-axes. The user can select from

one of 3 scaling units in addition to
the selection of manual or
automatic scaling. There is also a
vertical grid option.

Data Displays.

Wind. Choose wind speed units in

addition to a wind plot display.

Interface Level. Select this option

to display a horizontal line depicting
the wave altitude.

Wave Units. Select units desired

for display of wave Altitude,
Amplitude, and Vertical Velocity.

____________________________________________________________________________
NOTE: The Wave Decay Tab options are discussed later in the Wave Decay section of this chapter.
172

19.6 Mountains & Parameter Definitions.

The Mountains definitions box (left) is
displayed by either clicking on the
Mountains Menu option or by clicking
directly on the diagram’s mountain.

The “Default” mountain option will always

result in the analysis of maximum wave
and turbulence potential.

The “Local” mountain option displays the

user-defined local mountain parameters
for quick access to a common mountain.
This is defined using WMO # 00000 as
explained on the next page.

The user should specify actual mountain

parameters to achieve the best results.

Up to 2 mountain ridges can be specified

when using this option. Both mountains
should have the same height for best
results. See example below…

The solid wave line is the harmonic (or resonant) wave, derived from the two individual waves (shown as
dotted lines), as produced by the airflow over two mountain ridges.
173

19.7 Mountain Data.

Mountain data is entered into the RAOB program via 2 methods. First, the user can enter one or two
mountain ridges using the Mountain data entry screen shown on the prior page. Second, the user can
select the “Edit Mountain Parameter File” menu option shown above. By using this option, mountain data
can be stored in the RAOB.MTN data file for automatic retrieval. The RAOB.MTN parameter file is only
accessed when WMO coded (TTAA, etc.) data or data files containing WMO station numbers are used.
The sounding’s WMO number is used to link station information with associated mountain data.

Below is a listing of the RAOB.MTN file provided with RAOB’s distribution file. Like the locator file, the
header and format of the RAOB.MTN file must be maintained. All mountain data are listed by WMO
number, similar to the format of the RAOB.STN locator file. The RAOB.MTN file can be accessed using
the EDIT Menu option shown above, or with a standard text editor. The file’s header includes key
information about data entry. The file also contains 4 example mountain listings, where WMO #00000
indicates the optional “Local Mountain”. The “Local Mountain” (also explained in the prior page) allows
quick access to mountain parameters that are used frequently, regardless of the WMO number of the
sounding. The RAOB.MTN file also permits listing of double mountain data.

========================================================================
RAOB MOUNTAIN PARAMETER LISTING
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Entries may be added, deleted, or edited, BUT FORMAT MUST BE MAINTAINED.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
All data items must be comma-separated.
HEIGHT: Height of mountain top -- Feet -- Mean Sea Level.
HALF-WIDTH: Mid-elevation upwind slope distance (nm) from mountain ridge.
AXIS: Orientation of mountain ridge (degrees). Use 0 for any angle.
2nd MTN data are optional BUT must be filled with zeros (0s) if not used.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Units options (English or Metric) use either for the data header below:
WMO (feet) (nm) (deg) DIST (mn) (feet) (nm) (deg)
WMO (meter) (km) (deg) DIST (km) (meter) (km) (deg)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
NOTE: First 4 entries are examples only -- they use the English option.
You can also enter a WMO Code of 00000 which (if entered) will be
designated as the LOCAL Mountain. The LOCAL Mountain can be
loaded via the Sounding Toolbar and from the Wave Display screen.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
HEIGHT 1/2WIDTH AXIS 2nd MTN HEIGHT 1/2WIDTH AXIS
WMO (feet) (nm) (deg) DIST (mn) (feet) (nm) (deg)
===== ====== ====== === ======= ====== ====== ===
00000, 9000, 4, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0
00001, 2500, 3, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0
00002, 4500, 4.2, 330, 0, 0, 0, 0
00003, 8000, 2.3, 10, 5, 7000, 3, 25
99999
======================================================================

Note: The DIST column data identifies the distance between mountain ridges and is only used when two
mountains are identified for any particular WMO number.
174

19.8 Mountain-Wave Display Options.

The DISPLAYS Menu option contains two options. The “Full Sounding” returns the user back to the
original plotted sounding. The “Mini Sounding” produces the following screen example.

^
When the WAVES Menu option is activated, a list of all analyzed sounding waves is displayed as shown
below. It can also be activated by left-clicking on the wave diagram. The small buttons just below the
column headers toggle data units. Use this display to select which wave to plot, including an option to plot
all waves at the same time.
175

Mountain-Wave Display Options (continued).

The Wave Display listing (on prior page) contains several columns of wave parameter data:

LSp Lyra-Scorer parameter. LSp must decrease with height for wave formation.
WAVE/x Wavelength (along diagram’s x-axis). The longest value = predominate wave.
MTN#_ Turbulence intensity category.
Y Wave amplitude (along diagram’s y-axis). Vertical extent of wave.
W Wave’s maximum vertical velocity. Located at inflection points.

^
When the LISTINGS Menu option is activated, a user-configurable listing of downrange wave distances
and wave vertical velocities is displayed. This display can be edited and saved/printed. This listing can
also be activated by pressing the Space-Bar while viewing the Wave diagram.
176

19.9 Wave Decay.

Decay (dampening). RAOB’s wave

analyses equations do not incorporate
wave decay in either the horizontal or
vertical. This “decay” of the plotted wave
is only superficially applied (when selected
by the user) to help simulate observed
conditions for a particular event.

Note: caution should be used with wave

data beyond one wavelength downwind
from the mountain. Similarly, caution
should also be used with double ridge
analyses when the 2nd mountain is
beyond one wavelength of the 1st
mountain.

Above is an example of applied wave decay using the decay configuration options presented above. Note
that the decay function should only be used for specific wave cases where observation data is available to
reasonably identify the decay rate. The decay feature is only made available to the RAOB program for
graphic simulation purposes and is not an objective forecast tool.
177

19.10 Mountain-Wave Computations.

RAOB determines the existence of mountain waves and categorizes turbulence intensities based on
theoretical work by Lyra (1943) and Scorer (1949) with applications algorithms developed by Foltz (1967)
and Foldvick (1962). The critical factor in these wave calculations is the Lyra-Scorer parameter (LSp),
which is a function of atmospheric stability and vertical shear. Mountain (or lee) waves can only occur if
the LSp decreases with height. (LSp values are listed on the Complete Data listing for all data levels.)
2 2 2
LSp = (Lyra factor) - (Scorer factor)
2
where: Lyra factor = gβ/U where β = 1/θ ∗ ∂θ/∂Z

where: gβ = stability factor

g = acceleration of gravity
θ = potential temperature
Z = height
U = wind component normal to mountain
2 2
where: Scorer factor = ∂ U/∂z ∗ 1/U

When RAOB finds a region where LSp decreases with height, mountain parameters are then used to
determine wave characteristics. Three mountain parameters are required for wave analyses.

Height (ft). Must be with respect to sounding site elevation.

Half-width (nm). Distance between the mountain ridge (center line) and windward
slope as measured at the mid-elevation of the mountain.
Axis (deg). Angle (orientation) of mountain ridge. A value of 0 (zero) will treat
all winds as being perpendicular (normal) to the mountain.

The following equation was used by Foltz as the basis for development of his algorithms that are used by
RAOB. This equation determines the maximum vertical displacement of an air parcel traversing a
mountain lee wave.
-kb -1
ζz = -2πhbe ∗ (U1/Uz) ∗ ψzk ∗ (∂ψ1k/∂k) ∗ sin(kx)

where: ζz is the vertical displacement of a streamline from its undisturbed height z.

U1 is the horizontal gradient level wind component normal to the mountain.
Uz is the horizontal wind component normal to the mountain at level z.
x is the horizontal downwind distance from the mountain.
h is the height of the mountain.
b is the half-width of the mountain at mid-elevation.
ψzk is the streamfunction at level z for wave number k.
ψ1k is the streamfunction at gradient wind level for wave number k.

19.11 Wave Turbulence Categories.

Wave turbulence categories (Light, LT-MD, MD-SV, and Severe) are displayed on the Mountain-Wave
screen in addition to Sounding diagram’s Summary and Complete data listings. These wave turbulence
categories are determined as a function of W (maximum vertical velocity) and λ (wavelength) as
developed by Foltz (1967).

For best results, the sounding should be upwind of the mountain, where the sounding is located at the
lowest part of the upwind valley floor. In most cases, wave analyses are needed at locations were no
sounding sites exist. In these cases, a representative sounding will first need to be created, either
manually or by using RAOB’s optional vertical cross-section module or RAOB’s Merge function. When
generating a sounding, be sure that the sounding’s base elevation is coincident with the base of the
178

mountain. It is also very important to obtain accurate mountain parameter data. This data is best
obtained from detailed USGS topographic maps or other reliable sources.

If mountain data are not provided, RAOB then automatically uses a default 1km high mountain with a half-
width that is adjusted to the natural wavelength of the airstream, which then produces the maximum
potential wave amplitude (Corby and Wallington, 1956). This is useful for determining the maximum
extent of lee waves, but should be used with caution until actual mountain data are used for the specific
area of interest.

When viewing the plotted sounding, wave turbulence analyses are graphically depicted along the left side
of the diagram, similar to the CAT and Icing graphics produced on Sounding diagrams. Alphanumeric
wave data are available on both the Summary and Complete data listings of Sounding diagrams and are
displayed as follows:

LSp: Lyra-Scorer parameter; waves are possible when LSp decreases with height.
Wave/X: Wavelength; longest X is the predominant wave.
Wave/Y: Amplitude; vertical extent of the lee wave.
Wave/W: Maximum vertical velocity of the wave; located at inflection points.

Waves with very small X, Y, or W values are filtered out.

Depending on atmospheric conditions and mountain parameters, wave analyses may result in none to
many individual waves. It is important to note that the source literature indicates that the wave with the
longest wavelength is the predominant wave (this is the Wave/X data item displayed in the alphanumeric
listings). Even though the longest wavelength is the predominant wave, waves with wavelengths
consisting of fractional multiples (e.g., 1/2 or 1/4 size wave lengths) are also significant. For example, if
the predominate wave has a wavelength of 10 nm, another wave having a wavelength of 5 nm would also
be significant, but to a lesser extent.

There are many theories and examples of wave decay in the vertical. However, RAOB does not attempt
to replicate this phenomena. The user may find some assistance with the analyses of specific wave
instances through the analysis of the secondary (non-predominate) waves produced by RAOB.

Wave turbulence can also be greatly affected by extended or multiple mountain ridges. The following
paragraph shows how RAOB can assist with these analyses.
179

19.12 Double Mountains. RAOB computes the resonant (or harmonic) effects of double mountain
ridges upon lee waves. Foldvick’s resonant wave equation was derived for use with two mountains of the
same height. This equation, however, is applied to all double mountain sets entered for analyses, and
therefore, caution should be used for harmonic analyses resulting from mountains of significantly different
heights. RAOB minimizes this limitation by only computing wave harmonics for waves that exist at the
same height (interface level) for both mountains.

The basic equation by Foldvick (1962) is listed here for mountains with the same height.

W = 2 ∗ w ∗ cos(πd/λ) ∗ cos(2π/λ) ∗ (x-d/2) for x > d

where: W = resonant vertical velocity

d = distance between ridges
x = downwind distance from 1st ridge
λ = wavelength
w = sum of both vertical velocities at x

Parameters for the 2nd mountain can be entered when viewing the Wave Screen or as an entry in the
RAOB.MTN file as previously described. (See the example mountain data included with the distributed
RAOB.MTN file for format.) When viewing the Wave Screen, the 1st mountain is drawn in green and the
2nd mountain is mountain is drawn in blue. The wave from the 1st mountain is plotted with green dots
and the wave from the 2nd mountain is plotted with blue dots. The resultant resonant wave is plotted in
solid red. As mentioned above, only waves existing for both mountains (with respect to the same interface
level) are analyzed for resonant effects, even though each single mountain may have many more
independent waves.

____________________________________________________________________________
Among the assumptions employed by the wave turbulence algorithms, the Coriolis force is neglected
because of the local character of the phenomena.

RAOB’s wave turbulence analyses are only valid in the troposphere. Higher altitude results should be
used with caution.
180

20. SOARING Calculations.

The Soaring Menu Tool permits selection of surface temperatures to

simulate maximum heating for the day. Both Surface (air-temp) and
Dewpoint temperature data can be entered. Before the calculations
begin, RAOB first adjusts the lower sounding by making the sounding
dry-adiabatic from the user-supplied surface temperature (T). An
optional dew point temperature (Td) entry is used to adjust the same
lower layer, where the dew point change gradually diminishes with
height. The adjusted T and Td profiles are displayed in light red, while
the original sounding is plotted in dark red.

The adiabat representing the temperature associated with the Trigger

Height is plotted in blue as a reference line. All other text output is
displayed in the upper-right section of the sounding diagram.

The Trigger Temperature is automatically calculated and displayed

each time the Trigger Height is altered.

The “Clouds” button is only available with the optional Analytic module.

Use the "CCL" button to display the location of the Convective

Condensation Level. (see the CCL below)

The “Report" button produces a NWS-style "Soaring Guidance Report"

which can be printed, saved to file, and even emailed as an attached
text file.

For files containing multiple sounding profiles, the arrows at the bottom
of the Soaring toolbar allow sequencing of each profile.

CCL Note. The soaring CCL is determined from surface temperature data only. The RAOB program
allows users to configure CCL calculations with respect to the "mean lower layer", which will normally
result in different CCL values. So to be sure you have consistent CCL values, you must configure the
CCL "mean lower layer" to the 1 mb (hPa) value via Program Options’ “Parcel Lifting & CAPE” tab.

Soaring Data. By clicking on the

Calculate button, various soaring data
and indexes are displayed. The solid
vertical red-colored bar between the
sounding and the wind plot height scale
represents the estimated lift altitude.

Lindsay (1988) presents a good

overview of this data and its application
to soaring. Pearson (1995) presents a
“do-it-yourself” approach to soaring
using TI and related data.
181

SOARING Analyses (continued).

Thermal Index (TI) Data. This information is displayed along the left side of the diagram. TI data
help soaring (and hang-glider) pilots estimate flight altitudes and the strength of vertical lift. The TI is
determined by subtracting the environmental profile temperature from the temperature of the surface-
based dry-adiabat profile for each level of interest (NWS Handbook No. 3). Most soaring literature
indicates that a TI value of -3 to -4 reflects a very good chance of sailplanes reaching the altitude of this
temperature difference. TI values of -8 to -10 generally indicate very good lift conditions. TI values of 0 or
greater are generally unfavorable for soaring.

Researchers have correlated soaring altitudes and lift strength to TI data. Most work has been done with
respect to the height at which the dry-adiabatic lapse rate, which originates from the maximum surface
temperature, first intersects the sounding’s temperature profile. This is where TI = 0. This height is
referred to as Hγd, both in this manual and in RAOB’s displays. RAOB allows the user to select from 2
sources of Hγd based altitude and lift equations. The user can also select a third option, which averages
the 2 results. The sources are:

Rpe for Russell Pearson, whose equations were developed for use over the southwestern U.S.
MPi for Mario Piccagli, whose equations were developed for use over U.S. Mid-Atlantic States.

The equations for estimated soaring altitude (feet, AGL) are:

RPe: ALT = 133.72 + 1.03 ∗ Hγd Hγd is in feet, AGL.

MPi: ALT = 1580 + 0.57 ∗ Hγd

The equations for estimated lift strength (feet-per-minute, fpm) are:

RPe: LIFT = 41.49 + 0.07 ∗ Hγd Hγd is in feet, AGL

MPi: LIFT = 50.0 + 0.049 ∗ Hγd

The above equations apply only to dry thermals, which are conditions where no clouds exist. The effects
of moisture on thermal development and cloud formation are discussed in WMO’s Handbook of
Meteorological Forecasting for Soaring Flight. Although not employed in RAOB, this handbook presents
several manual techniques for analyzing soaring potential with respect to atmospheric moisture. One
good indicator of low-level moisture is the Convective Condensation Level (CCL), which typically identifies
the height of cumuliform cloud bases, and which is normally produced from surface heating and
associated thermal activity. Mario Piccagli (e.g., MPi) developed a lift equation using the height of the
CCL (CCLHT), from which RAOB also displays resulting lift strength in fpm. This equation is:

MPi: LIFTCCL = -10.0 + 0.078 ∗ CCLHT CCLHT is in feet, AGL

Trigger Temperature. This is the surface temperature required to produce a dry-adiabatic lapse
rate that will intersect the sounding at the altitude specified. This altitude is initially set at 2,500 feet, but it
can be changed by editing the “Trigger Height” text box.

Soaring Index (SI) data. Researchers have recently developed the Soaring Index which is
designed to incorporate the vertical temperature gradient between the trigger temperature and the
maximum altitude of thermal activity (Armstrong and Hill, 1976). Like the above Pearson and Piccagli lift
strength estimates, the Soaring Index also produces an estimated lift strength in feet-per-minute (fpm).

Soaring Index = 3 ∗ (Z/100) + 10 ∗ t

where: Z = maximum thermal altitude, feet, AGL
t = TTRIGGER - TMAXTHERMAL (°C)
TTRIGGER = sounding temperature at trigger altitude
TMAXTHERMAL = sounding temperature at Z (max thermal altitude)
182

21. FRONTAL ANALYSES.

The features presented in this section are only available with the optional Fronts & Forecast module.

21.1 Overview.

The RAOB program provides the user with a vast array of analytical tools and displays. RAOB’s editing
and interactive functions allow the user to simulate or estimate what-if scenarios and more importantly –
provides users rudimentary ability to create forecast soundings. RAOB’s “Fronts & Forecast” module now
offers the user a fast and objective method for creating reliable short-term forecast soundings, completely
independent from outside forecast data. RAOB is a complete, single-station, analysis and forecast tool.

RAOB’s Fronts & Forecasts module can locate frontal zones and create short-term forecasts solely from
the sounding data itself. RAOB creates forecast soundings via two different methods: (1) Temperature
advections derived from thermal wind data, and (2) Temperature/dewpoint & wind advections derived from
upstream soundings. RAOB offers a variety of forecast options for both forecast modes. The first
forecast method (using only thermal wind data) is described below.

21.2 Thermal Wind Theory.

Forecasts created using the “thermal wind” method use classic thermodynamic relationships to identify
temperature advection and frontal layers from a sounding’s wind data. This method historically involved
manually intensive procedures to arrive at a forecast sounding, which have mostly been abandoned since
the advent of numerical products. RAOB automates those manually intensive and cumbersome
procedures, turning thermal wind theory into a powerful forecast tool. In cases where the user only has a
surface observation and a local sounding, RAOB systematically applies thermal wind theory to create a
forecast sounding. In the “old days” this process was known as single station analysis.

The earliest comprehensive examination of thermal wind theory was documented by Oliver & Oliver
(1945). It is important to note that the thermal wind is not a wind, but is the difference in geostrophic wind
between two levels in the atmosphere – it is a wind shear vector (VT). The thermal wind is a theoretical
wind that blows parallel to the thickness lines, which is analogous to how the geostrophic wind blows
parallel to the height contours. The significance of the thermal wind is that it correlates the vertical
geostrophic wind shear between two levels of a sounding to the mean horizontal temperature gradient in
the layer between the same two levels. Furthermore, looking downwind of the thermal wind vector, colder
air is always on the left side and warmer air is on the right side. In the Southern Hemisphere, this
relationship is reversed. The summary importance of thermal wind (VT) theory is two-fold:

(1). When the geostrophic winds turn clockwise (or veer) with height, warm air advection occurs.
(2). When the geostrophic winds turn counter-clockwise (or back) with height, cold air advection occurs.

Thermal wind (VT)

By applying the above correlations to a sounding’s hodograph, thermal advections can be inferred and a
reliable short-term forecast sounding can be created. Following several requests from RAOB users to
apply thermal wind theory to this program, manual techniques from several sources were consolidated
into the procedures described on the following pages. Some of these sources, originally in German, were
translated by Gilbert Christoffel, who also provided valuable assistance with converting these long
established manual procedures into RAOB program algorithms.
183

21.3 Thermal Wind Equation.

The following thermal wind equation was taken from Holton (1972).

P1
VT = -R/ƒ ∫ (k x T) dlnp where : P1 and P0 are upper and lower pressure levels.
P0

Through a series of transformations, this equation can be used to estimate the mean horizontal
temperature advection in a layer. These advections can then be applied to the sounding’s temperature
profile to obtain a forecast sounding. Advection is thus defined as:

∆T/∆t = ∆T/∆n • Vn where : ∆T/∆n = the mean temperature gradient

Vn = the vector normal to the thermal wind

And where ∆T/∆n = VT • ƒ/(R • ln(P0/P1)) • C where : VT = the thermal wind

ƒ = the Coriolis parameter
R = the gas constant for dry air
P0/P1 = adjacent pressure levels
C = units conversion constant

The diagram at left illustrates the calculation

of the Advection term (∆T/∆t) for one layer
of the hodograph.

For this example the Advection is calculated

for the 500 to 600 mb layer. The thermal
wind (VT) and the normal wind (Vn) are
directly measured as 18 kt and 44 kt,
respectively.

Variable factors within the gradient (∆T/∆n)

term are the thermal wind (VT), the Coriolis
parameter (ƒ) for a certain latitude, and the
pressure level ratio (P0/P1) of 500/600 mb.

The constants R and C remain the same for

all sounding levels.

Using the above example diagram and data, the temperature advection for the 600 to 500 mb layer can be
calculated. Since Advection = ∆T/∆t = ∆T/∆n • Vn, we already know Vn = 44 kt. We now need to
calculate the Gradient term ∆T/∆n ...

∆T/∆n = VT • ƒ/(R • ln(P0/P1)) • C = 18 • ƒ/(R • ln(600/500)) • C = 18 • 0.00197 = 0.0355 °C/nm

where : the Coriolis parameter (ƒ) is with respect to 38 degrees latitude.

Therefore, Advection = ∆T/∆t = ∆T/∆n • Vn = 0.0355 • 44 = +1.56 °C/hr for the 600 to 500 mb layer.

When the temperature advections for each layer are computed, the advection rates can then be applied to
the sounding’s temperature profile to create a short-term forecast sounding. Although the above example
reflects winds at 100 mb intervals, RAOB’s thermal wind calculations are always done at 25 mb intervals.
184

21.4 Frontal Analysis Screen.

Right. The sounding’s frontal layers can be

visualized by using RAOB’s “Frontal Analysis”
display option (or by pressing the Ctrl-F
keys).

Below. Similar to the Hodograph, the frontal

analysis screen provides a variety of tools
and text data used to select the predominant
front. (Unlike the Hodograph, the wind
vectors are not graphically interactive.)

The data box immediately below the hodograph contains key data for frontal layer identification. Click on
the “Layer (mb)” buttons to see any of the sounding’s three most significant frontal zones. The front with
the highest “Gradient (°C/nm)” value is usually the predominant frontal layer and is initially plotted on the
hodograph. If the orientation of the actual surface front matches (as closely as possible) the front
displayed on the hodograph, then the hodograph’s predominant front is further justified.

As each front is displayed (by clicking the Layer buttons), a text box displaying key frontal characteristics
is presented in the adjacent text box located at the lower-left corner of the screen. These frontal
characteristics can help with the timing and location of frontal precipitation and associated weather.

At the top center of the screen are listed current frontal configuration settings, which are described later.
185

Frontal Analysis Screen (continued).

The two boxes shown below can be found immediately below the frontal analysis screen’s hodograph.
Upon initial viewing of the analysis screen, the hodograph’s three most significant fronts with respect to
Gradient (°C/nm) values are displayed (see box at right). The front with the largest Gradient value is
always initially displayed and plotted on the hodograph – and is highlighted in bold in the frontal data box.
In this case, the “850/750” frontal layer is being displayed and plotted on the hodograph. (Note: you can
right click on the 850/750 button to reverse the button’s text to 750/850.)

The text box (shown above left) always displays details about the front that is plotted on the hodograph. In
this case, the front being described is the “850/750” frontal layer.

Front character is determined by the wind characteristics below and above the frontal layer as depicted
below. RAOB automatically applies the following frontal slopes as listed below, however, the user can
specify other slope ratios via the diagram configuration screen (see next section).

Warmfronts (both types): 1:120 -- Anabatic Cold Front: 1:80 -- Katabatic Cold Front: 1:40

Bergeron Front Classifications

W = Warm air flow.

K = Cold air flow.

Ana = Upwards flow.

Kata = Downwards flow.

Frontal speed is determined by the average “normal” winds below

the frontal layer. “Normal” winds are defined as the perpendicular
wind between the plotted front and the hodograph’s wind plot.
Normal wind data can be toggled for viewing by clicking on the thin
horizontal button just below the “Thermal Wind” data header →

In the hodograph example at left, a warm front is

analyzed between the 600 and 500 mb wind layer.
The warm front is drawn perpendicular to the 600/500
mb thermal wind. The “normal” winds are drawn as
dotted vectors. The frontal speed is, therefore,
calculated as:

Frontal Speed = (7 + 15 + 20) / 3 = 14 kts

186

Frontal Analysis Screen (continued).

Frontal distance is calculated using the mean height of the frontal layer and the frontal slope with respect
to sounding’s location.

Vertical motion (w) can be roughly calculated accordingly … for a warm [cold] front, subtract the mean
“normal” winds below [above] the frontal layer from the mean “normal” winds above [below] the front, and
then divide by the frontal slope. RAOB uses the 300 mb level as the upper-limit for these calculations.

Precipitation formation (∆t hours) can also be roughly calculated by the following equation:
__
∆t = ∑(T-Td) · 100 / w
_
where ∑(T-Td) = mean dewpoint depression between the frontal layer and 600 mb.
100 represents the factor (meters) necessary to lift every T-Td (°C) to saturation.
w (meters/hour) represents the vertical motion (listed above).

Clouds and precip designations are based on the “front character” as defined on the prior page. Only
anabatic cold and warm fronts lead to substantial precipitation as they are accompanied by significant
lifting (w) of the frontal layer.

21.5 Frontal Selection. This is the main focus of “single station analyses” … how to best identify the
sounding’s frontal layer (or layers), which then allows better identification of associated weather patterns,
which then leads to a better forecast. While there is no one rule that can always be guaranteed to select
the predominant frontal layer of a sounding, the following guidelines should be used:

(1). Select the hodograph front (layer) that most closely matches the orientation of the surface front as
shown on the current synoptic surface map. The “Hodo-Front Manual Mode” screen (described later in
this section) provides more tools to assist with this selection.

(2). Look for the frontal layer with the largest temperature gradient (°C/nm).

(3). Look for frontal and subsidence inversion* layers that coincide.

(4). Look for the presence of clouds* as detected on the sounding diagram.

(5). For warm fronts, the user should choose a sounding that lies ahead of the surface front. For cold
fronts, the user should choose a sounding that lies behind the surface front.

* These parameters are only available for display when using the optional Analytic program module.
187

21.6 Frontal Analysis Configuration. Right-click while over the hodograph to display the “Frontal
Analyses & Thermal Wind Configuration Options” tab. These options are critical to the selection of the
sounding’s predominant frontal layer.

It is important to understand that RAOB calculates thermal wind data at four different vertical intervals (25,
50, 75 & 100 mb) to help the user better identify the predominant front. Remember, the predominant front
should, as closely as possible, match the orientation of the actual surface front (warm or cold).

Thermal wind interval analysis mode. (See the 3-button options box located at the upper-left corner of the
above image.) When using the Default mode, RAOB displays the 3 fronts with the largest Gradient
(°C/nm) values using the selected thermal wind (25, 50, 75, or 100 mb) interval. All thermal wind intervals
are searched when the Automatic mode is used. With the Manual option, the program automatically
displays the Hodo-Front Manual Mode screen, which is shown on the next page.

Angular threshold for thermal wind segment group. This option becomes increasingly applicable as the
“thermal wind interval” decreases. This option permits the grouping of similarly oriented wind vectors.

Minimum temperature gradient threshold (°C/nm). This option filters out the weak frontal layers. The
default value is 0.04 °C/nm. Remember, the predominant front usually reflects the layer with the highest
gradient value. If the analyzed sounding produces no frontal layers, then try reducing the threshold value.

Boundary (friction) layer depth. This option eliminates false frontal layers within the friction layer, which
are commonly caused by the Ekman spiral. A depth of 1000 meters typically avoids most friction effects.

Frontal slope selection. This option is not used for frontal selection, but is instead only used during the
creation of the “frontal characteristics” text box, located at the lower-left corner of the display screen. It is
best to use the Automatic option, unless knowledge of the frontal slope is reasonably known.

Apply % of frontal Advection values (°C/hr). Experience shows that the temperature advection rates are
usually half (50%) of the calculated advection values. As with the frontal slope option, this option only
affects the frontal diagnostics, and are displayed in the frontal layer table below the diagram.
188

21.7 Hodo-Front Manual Screen.

Click the Hodograph’s “Manual” button to display the Hodo-Front

Manual Mode screen (shown below) for detailed front data.

The "Hodo-Front Manual Screen" permits the user to thoroughly study the sounding's 3 most significant
frontal layers. The primary goal, however, is to select the front that best matches the orientation of the
actual surface front. The orientation of each front is plotted in red (warm front) or blue (cold front) as
miniature frontal images near the top of each of the four data columns. In the example shown above, the
th
100 mb wind interval (4 data column) does not display a front, because no frontal zones met the Gradient
threshold of 0.040 °C/nm (see Configuration Options on prior page) at 100 mb intervals.

Frontal Parameters. These three options allow the display of the sounding's Gradient, Advection, and
Thermal Wind data. When comparing the four data intervals, the user should select the interval with the
strongest gradient values and the front that best matches the surface front orientation. The "Gradient"
parameter is typically the most significant parameter for selection purposes.

Frontal Zones with... This option lets the user

see the other (weaker) fronts within the
sounding, which is similar to the three frontal
display options available on the main Frontal
Analysis screen (see image at right). The 2nd
and 3rd most significant fronts can help
analyze an airmass containing more than one
frontal layer.
189

Hodo-Front Manual Screen (continued).

Shade frontal zones. Select this option to display the physical location of each frontal zone (layer). These
zones are shaded in a medium gray color.

Shade inversion layers. This option also helps with frontal selection, as the four types of inversions are
shaded on the diagram. Stronger inversions (>= 5°C spread) are shaded in yellow while weaker
inversions (< 5°C spread) are shaded in light green.

Action Buttons. Near the top of each wind interval column are 2 action buttons...

Use this button to exit the Hodo-Front screen and plot the
respective front on the main Sounding Diagram screen.

Use this button to exit the Hodo-Front screen and plot the
respective front on the Frontal Analysis screen.

Historically, manual
hodo-front analyses
were only performed
using the 100 mb
th
data interval (4
column) since most
data only consisted
of the standard
WMO formatted
TTAA data sets.
Computerization
now allows easy
interpolation of
smaller interval wind
(25, 50 & 75 mb)
data, which allows
detection of frontal
zones with greater
accuracy when
matching surface
frontal orientations.

The image displayed below shows the corresponding sounding plot with the same shaded frontal zone
and inversion layers.
190

22. FORECAST SOUNDINGS.

Features presented in this section are only available with the optional Fronts & Forecast program module.

22.1 Overview

The Forecast Toolbar.

RAOB’s Fronts & Forecast module creates forecast
soundings using only observed data. The Forecast Toolbar
(at left) controls forecast functions. RAOB creates forecast
soundings by one of two different methods: (1) Temperature
(drybulb only) advections derived from thermal wind data,
and (2) Temperature & dewpoint advections, along with
wind changes, that are derived from upstream soundings.

By selecting the “Forecast” Menu bar option, a new control

panel called Forecast … is displayed along the left side of
the sounding diagram (as shown to the left). In this
example, the plotted sounding comes from a datafile
containing just one sounding, therefore, the “Single station”
panel option is only available. The “Multi station” option also
becomes available with datafiles containing more than one
sounding (which is discussed later in this section).

The buttons marked with the > and < symbols apply
+/- 1-hour time steps to the sounding, whereas the >> and
<< buttons apply +/- 6-hour time steps. The 0 button resets
the sounding to its original state. The box immediately
below the 0 button displays the current forecast hour.

Use the Save button to save any forecast sounding data to

file. The user will be prompted for a file path and filename.
Use the Auto-save button to have RAOB automatically
save each sounding’s time step to file. When selected, the
Forecast Auto-Save options display screen appears (as
shown below). After the Activate Auto-Save button is
selected, sounding data will be saved to the same file as
appended data sets following selection of each forecast
time step. Data will be saved in the RAOB.CSV format.

This auto-save capability

can create a file
containing sequential
forecast soundings, which
then can be used to
create a time-series (time-
height diagrams) using
the optional Cross-Section
program module.
191

22.2 Single Station Forecasting.

This forecast option can be extremely useful when no other regional sounding information is available. A
very reasonable, short-term forecast can be made from the sounding’s inherent thermal wind
characteristics. The single station forecast mode only uses thermal wind temperature advections when
generating forecast soundings. Forecast values are only applied to the sounding’s environmental (dry
bulb) profile, while dewpoint and wind data remain unchanged. Note: The sounding’s thermal wind
temperature advection data can be viewed by using the Sounding’s Frontal Analysis Menu Display
option, and are independent of any warm or cold front selections.

With each forecast time increment selected, the thermal wind advections are applied through the entire
sounding using 25 mb (hPa) intervals, after which, RAOB then filters the sounding in order to display only
the significant temperature gradients and standard pressure levels in accordance with WMO standards.

The Single station forecast mode allows the user to control the
forecast process with respect to two layers: the Main Layer and the
Boundary Layer.

The Main Layer options can control thermal wind advections

throughout the entire depth of the sounding. The Main Layer’s upper
limit is preset at 300 mb, while the lower limit is set using the Bottom
limit box. The Bottom limit box allows the user to prevent forecast
advection data from being applied to a specified lower layer, such as
the boundary or friction layer. In cold weather at higher latitudes, it is
usually safe to use 0 meters for the bottom limit since solar heating is
minimally affective. In warmer environments, a 1000 meter limit is
reasonable, where the user should then also either manually adjust
boundary level data or use the “Boundary Layer” forecast options
discussed below.

Use the Smoothing option to reduce irregular gradients for a more

natural profile. Use the Retain dewpoint spread option for those
situations were moisture spread consistency is important.

The Boundary Layer section is used to help simulate diurnal affects

and produce a more representative forecast sounding at the lowest
levels. When used, the boundary layer’s surface pressure and
temperature & dewpoint changes can be controlled. (Positive and
negative values are allowed.)

The Mixing Depth limit is always applied to cooling surface

temperatures as it uses the common DALR (dry adiabatic lapse rate)
method to establish the depth of the mixing layer. The mixing depth
can also be applied to warming surface temperatures if the Also use
for warming Tmp box is checked, which disables the DALR mode.

Note: The use of the Mixing Depth layer overrides any forecast data
created by the Main Layer advections.

The Analyze Toolbar and Refresh buttons function in the same fashion as the sounding’s Analyze
feature where various indices and parameters can be graphically applied to the sounding diagram. The
sounding’s forecast profile will be retained upon exiting the Forecast mode, until the Restore menu option
is applied.
192

22.3 Multi Station Forecasting.

The multi station forecast mode is only available when using a datafile
containing multiple soundings (of WMO format), where each sounding
represents a different geographic location.

This mode is especially useful if there are several soundings upwind of

the base sounding. This mode can give the user good short-term
forecast information before conventional forecast products are available
from centralized data processing centers.

The user can select the upstream search radius through use of the
Sounding range (km) data box. When this mode is initially used, the
user must click the Search for soundings button so RAOB can locate
the upstream soundings. Once the upstream stations have been
located, this button changes its “button name” to View soundings,
where after clicked, will display a map of the selected stations (see next
page for examples).

The upstream sounding station selection criteria are a direct function of

the base soundings’ wind directions. Upstream selections are made at a
1 KM vertical resolution. RAOB first segments the sounding’s wind data
into 1 KM winds, from which it then locates upwind stations out to the
range specified in the “Sounding range (km)” user option (discussed
above). The 1 KM vertical resolution guarantees a representative
selection of upwind stations throughout the entire sounding. (The user
can also manually override the automatic upwind selections as
described on the next page.) As the forecast time steps increase, data
from soundings further upwind are systematically used for advections.

Temperature and wind forecast change rates are determined solely by

the wind speeds of the base sounding’s winds. However, the user can
control the degree of advection by using the Apply % of advection input
field. If the prevailing winds are zonal, then a high advection value is
appropriate. However, if the wind patterns are of high amplitude, then
lower advection values are appropriate.

The Smoothing option is equivalent to the single-station smoothing option, as it reduces irregular
gradients for a more natural profile appearance.

The multi station forecast mode makes excellent use of upstream sounding data. However, there are
times when it is useful to also see the advections produced by the sounding’s thermal wind data (e.g., the
forecast sounding produced via the Single station forecast mode). Therefore, the Thermal wind
advections option is made available so the user can easily compare forecast data. This comparison can
be especially useful for the very short-term forecast range. When used, the “thermal wind” forecast
sounding profile is plotted in a brown color in order to differentiate forecast profiles.

The Analyze Toolbar and Refresh buttons function in the same fashion as the sounding’s Analyze
feature where various indices and parameters can be graphically applied to the sounding diagram. The
sounding’s forecast profile will be retained upon exiting the Forecast mode, until the Restore menu option
is applied.
193

Multi Station Forecasting (continued).

Upon activation of the
“View soundings” button,
a map of nearby
soundings is displayed.
All soundings are within
the range specified by
the “Sounding range”
input box on the
Forecast Toolbar.
Sounding dots plotted in
a Red color indicate
those soundings that are
“upwind” of the base
sounding, which is
plotted with a large Black
dot. By moving the
mouse cursor over the
plotted wind images, the
user can see which
upstream soundings
coincide with each 1 KM
mean wind.

The selection of
“upstream” soundings is
initially automatically
determined by RAOB
(they are plotted with
Red dots.) However,
these soundings can be
manually adjusted using
these 3 steps:

One.
Click down and hold the
mouse button to
highlight (green box)
selected winds.

Two.
Drag mouse to preferred
“upwind” station to be
used for forecast
advections.

Three.
Release mouse button
over preferred “upwind”
sounding.

Use the “Restore” menu

option to return
automatic upwind
selections.
194

22.4 Forecast Maximum Surface Temperature.

You can easily forecast the maximum surface temperature by clicking on the above menu option.

Using an early morning sounding, RAOB uses

the diagram at left and calculates the shaded
areas to graphically find equal energy areas of
vertically and horizontally hatched regions.
This represents the potential change in
surface temperature from point G to point F as
a result of solar heating. This method
assumes that at maximum heating the
sounding profile will become dry adiabatic.
(line EF).

This method is often referred to as Gold’s (1933) equal-area methodology of forecasting maximum
surface temperatures. This method assumes no clouds, light winds, and summer months. The user can
override these assumptions by using the configuration options shown below.

By selecting the above “Configure Max

Temp Options” menu option, Gold’s 3
assumptions can be individually configured
for Clouds, Winds, and Seasons as seen
in the 3 following panels. Each
assumption panel can be turned ON or
OFF with the Activate option.
195

23. Custom View.

RAOB’s Custom View display system lets you design

your own RAOB display screen, regardless of screen
size or orientation (horizontal or vertical). The below
example contains 20 panel images using a widescreen
monitor. Two panels are even embedded within other
panels. Note the Hail / No-Hail image is placed within
the top Sounding panel while the Precip-Type image is
placed within the lower Sounding panel.

The Custom View display screen allows up to 20 panels. The only requirement is selection of at least one
Diagram panel, such as a Sounding or Cross-Section diagram. See the below image for the Panel
Selector options used for the creation of the above Custom View screen. Note that this example contains
2 Sounding panels and 2 Cross-Section panels, and 16 other panel selections. The Displays (Text &
Images) panel options even offer blank panels, which allow free form Text entry or display of any
customer provided images.
196

Custom View (continued).

A key advantage of the Custom View screen is that all panels are synchronized to the same sounding
data. There are 2 types of data synchronization modes:

Mode 1: Sounding Data. When a sounding file is loaded, all panels will display data from the same
sounding file. All graphic and text panels will display their respective images and data. A Cross-Section
panel should not be included with this display mode.

Mode 2: Cross-Section Data. When a cross-section file is loaded, the Cross-Section panels will display
the same sectional data, while all the Sounding-related panels (such Hodograph and Mountain-Wave) will
display the individual sounding profile as selected from the Cross-Section display. Individual sounding
profiles are selected from the Cross-Section images by using either a mouse click, the movie-loop
controller, or cursor keys. The above Custom View example employs this mode of data synchronization.

Use the Panels and Arrange menu

options (shown at left) to design your
custom view. The Panels menu
displays the "Panel Selector" as
shown on the prior page.

You may ask that with all the different kinds of diagrams and
images, "how are the diagram and related configuration options
handled?" Each panel contains its own unique menu. The
menus are accessed simply by clicking on the image. A left-click
presents the main popup menu (as shown left), while for the
more involved diagrams (such as the Sounding and Cross-
Section images), a right-click produces the same unique
menuing action as experienced on the full screen version of the
panels. You'll note that the top-most popup menu option always
lists the "Full Screen" option, which when selected, automatically
transfers the user to the diagram’s home display screen.

Some diagram interactive features,

such as the Sounding's "click &
drag" functions are not available
with the Custom View. However, full
diagram interactive functionality is
quickly available just by clicking on
the "Full Screen" menu option.
Other data control options will
appear when hovering the mouse
over the panel of interest.

There's more. You can save up to 9

different display configurations for
instant recall. Just use the "Custom
Views" menu option as shown at
left.
197

Custom View (continued): the Super Meteogram.

The one diagram option not shown on the prior

Custom View examples is the new Super-
Meteogram display. It not only provides the
standard meteogram graphs, but it is also fully
user configurable and provides three Y-Axis
display modes as shown at left.

Additionally, the Super-Meteogram offers a one-of-

a-kind data projection (extrapolation) function
which provides short-term parameter forecasts out
to 3 hours. Note that these projections only work
for time-series sounding data, and they are only
intended to be used with "real-time" sounding data
produced by the non-conventional sounding
profilers: microwave / laser / radar / acoustic. The
below Custom View example contains the Super-
Meteogram, a Time-Series diagram, a Sounding
diagram, and a Fog index display.
198

24. RAW DATA FORMAT. Below is a short example:

"RAOB6116","Example sounding data file",1,2,3

32.07,"N",110.56,"W",789,100
"AUTO",1,"NO",2,0,0,0,0,0,0
927,2,.8
850,1.2,-3
0,150,4
125,180,5
430,245,8
"ST",59,"SCT",74
3500,5,20
8,2700,4,25

HEADER Lines (3)

First line: "RAOB6116" RAOB program version used when data file is saved.
The last 4 digits are the first 4 digits of the program serial number.
"Sounding" Information line, either automatically or manually entered.
1 No. 1 indicates a "raw" data file.
2 Indicates two (2) pressure/temp data levels.
3 Indicates three (3) height/wind data levels.

Second line: 32.07 Latitude (32 degrees and 7 minutes).

"N" "N"orth latitude.
110.56 Longitude (110 degrees and 56 minutes).
"W" "W"est longitude.
789 Station height is 789 meters.
100 Height of first sounding temperature: AGL, meters.
Value is 0 (zero) if data starts at the surface.

Third line: "AUTO" Indicates Cloud data is "automatically" determined.

1 Indicates RAOB only found 1 cloud level.
"NO" Indicates "precipitation" was not occurring.
2 Indicates 2 sets of mountain parameters (double ridge).
0,0,0,0,0,0 These last 6 fields are reserved for future use.
rd
NOTE: for new datafiles, highly recommend the 3 header line be entered as
this example line above. The program will make any necessary changes later.

PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE Data
Format: Pressure (mb), Temperature (°C), Dewpoint (°C)

HEIGHT/WIND Data
Format: Height (m, AGL), Wind direction (degrees), Wind speed (knots)
Note: Heights are saved in decimal format to retain accuracy when data are originally entered in feet.

CLOUD Data (Optional: permits manual specification of cloud layers.)

Format: Cloud type, Cloud base (ft x 100), Cloud coverage, Cloud tops (ft x 100)

MOUNTAIN Data (Optional: requires use of the Turbulence & Wave module.)
st
Format: 1 Mtn: Height (ft), Base half-width (nm), Axis orientation (degrees)
nd st nd
2 Mtn: Distance from 1 Mtn (nm), 2 Mtn: Hgt, Half-Width, Axis
199

25. RAOB CSV data format & example.

RAOB/CSV, Example CSV Data Sounding Title
INFO:1, First line of freeform text
INFO:2, Another freeform text line
DTG, 2013-01-25 14:15:30
LAT, 25.12, N
LON, 123.45, W
ELEV, 50, M (F option available beginning with RAOB 6.8)
WMO, 12345
TEMPERATURE, C
MOISTURE, TD
WIND, kts
GPM, MSL, M (F option available beginning with RAOB 6.8)
MISSING, -999
SORT, YES
OZONE, mPa
EXTRA#1, Extra#1Name, Extra#1Units
EXTRA#2, Extra#2Name, Extra#2Units
SCALAR#1, Scalar#1Name, Scalar#1Value, Scalar#1Units
SCALAR#2, Scalar#2Name, Scalar#2Value, Scalar#2Units
RAOB/DATA
PRES, TEMP, TD, WIND, SPEED, GPM, OZONE, OMEGA, CFRL, VapDen, LiqWat, WSPEED, Extra1, Extra2
1000, 20, 10, 270, 10, 50, 3.21, -0.3, 0, 3.660, 0.000, 1, 13, 4.1
850, 15, 0, 290, 20, 1400, 3.31, -0.6, 10, 3.580, 0.000, 3, 14, 5.2
–999, -999, -999, 330, 5, 2500, 2.25, -0.3, -999, -999, -999, 2, 15, 6.3
700, 10, -5, 90, 10, -999, 6.90, 0.0, 5, 3.331, 0.000, -1, 16, 7.4
500, -999, -999, 240, 25, -999, 10.11, 0.4, -999, -999, -999, -2, 17, 8.5

FILE HEADER Descriptions . . .

Mandatory. “RAOB/CSV” is a required header line.

The following data fields are optional, but should used if known.

INFO:1 and INFO:2 are both optional freeform text lines, and must not contain commas.

DTG is the “Date-Time-Group” field. It is in UTC (or universal) time. Example: 2013-01-25 14:15:30
Highly recommended if soundings are to be used for Time-Height diagramming.

LAT is required for cross-sections. Latitude is in “decimal degrees”. Next data field is “N” or “S”.
LON is required for cross-sections. Longitude is in “decimal degrees”. Next data field is “E” or “W”.

ELEV is optional, but highly recommended, with "M"eters or "F"eet units. "M" is the default value.
If the sounding is “elevated” like ACARS and Satellite-derived” profiles, then use this header:
st
“ELEV, Elevated” and the 1 data line must then contain a height value in the GPM column.

WMO (5-digit identifier number) is optional. When used, and if this WMO number is listed in
the RAOB.STN locator file, then the Lat/Lon & Elev data will automatically be accessed. If this
number is listed in the RAOB.MTN file, the associated mountain data will be accessed.

TEMPERATURE. Optional Kelvin (K) units. Default is Celsius ( C ).

MOISTURE. Optional dewpoint (TD) or humidity (RH) input. Default is TD

GPM. Optional wind height type, “MSL” (default) or “AGL”. Units are: "M"eters (default) or "F"eet.

MISSING. Optional missing data value. Default is –999. Value must be within +/-32000.

SORT. Optional data sorting option. Default is YES

OZONE. Flags the use of this optional data column. Units: nbar or mPa
200

WIND. Optional wind speed units, “kts” or “m/s”. Default is kts

Note: Add “U/V” after the wind Units to flag data as having U/V wind components.
When using U/V component winds, change the data header from
WIND to UU and SPEED to VV as shown in the below example header …

PRES, TEMP, TD, UU, VV, GPM, WSPEED

The vertical wind data column (WSPEED) must use the same Wind Speed units as U/V data.
The upward motion values are positive and downward motion values are negative.

Wind direction can reported in NATO Mils (vs degrees) units by adding "MILS" after wind speed units.

EXTRA DATA. Optional 1, 2 or 3 user-defined data types. Use any kind of data that can numerically
represent a profile, such as Temperature. The ExtraData Names can be any alpha-numeric combination
up to 15 characters long. The last field is the Units of the data values (7 character max), such as “dB”.

Example: EXTRA#1, SNR, dB

Note: When “Units” with exponents are entered with a caret (^) symbol, such as “m^3”, RAOB will
3
automatically convert the units numeric value to superscript, like this: “m ”.

SCALAR DATA. Optional 1 or 2 user-defined scalar Names (up to 10 characters) and their Units (up to 7
characters). Display on the Sounding’s custom parameter List and plot on Cross-Section’s Meteograms.
The Note about “Units” (see above) also apply to the Units of SCALAR data.

Example: SCALAR#1, SeaTemp, 35, C

DATA HEADER Descriptions . . .

Mandatory. “RAOB/DATA” is a required header line.

Mandatory. Data column headers are required. The first 6 data columns are mandatory and they
(PRES, TEMP, TD, WIND, SPEED, GPM) must be present in this exact sequence and spelling
for each data file. The remaining 8 data items (OZONE, OMEGA, CFRL, VapDen, LiqWat,
WSPEED, Extra1, Extra2) are optional and can be listed in any sequence or grouping. For
example, after the required GPM column header, CFRL and OZONE can be listed if needed.

DATA COLUMN Descriptions . . .

There can be 6 to 15 columns of data (which must correspond to the above header data) . . .

PRES, TEMP, TD, WIND, SPEED, GPM, OZONE, OMEGA, CFRL, VapDen, LiqWat, WSPEED, Extra1, Extra2, Extra3

Pressure (mb or hPa). Precision: tenths.

Temperature (°C). Precision: tenths.
Moisture. Precision: tenths. TD (°C) or RH (%).
Wind direction. Degrees (default) or Mils. Precision: whole degrees or Mils.
Wind speed (kts or m/s). Precision: tenths.
GPM Wind height (meters, MSL or AGL).
OZONE (nbar or mPa). Precision: hundredths.
OMEGA (microbars/second). Precision: tenths.
CFRL (percentage of cloud cover). Precision: tenths.
VapDen (g/m^3) and LiqWat (g/m^3). Precision: thousandths.
Vertical Wind (W) speed (kts or m/s). Precision: tenths.
EXTRA#1 and EXTRA#2. User-defined data types. Precision is automatically determined.

NOTE 1: Maximum data levels are currently 10,000.

NOTE 2: There must be at least 2 levels of Pres/Temp data or 2 levels of Height/Wind data.
201

26. REFERENCES.

AFWA TN - 98/002, "Meteorological Techniques", Air Force Weather Agency/DNT, Offutt Air Force Base,
NE. USAF, 15 July 1998.

AWS/TR - 81/001. Forecasting Aircraft Condensation Trails, USAF, 1981.

2WW/FM - 88/001. Summary of 2WW Forecaster Hints, 1977-1987. USAF, 88.

2WW/TN - 79/008. A New Technique for Forecasting the Occurrence of Fog and Low Stratus Ceilings by
Use of Chart. USAF, 79.

7WW/FM - 91/001. Low-Level Wind Shear: Still Dangerous After All These Years.
USAF, May 91.

AFGWC/TN - 79/001 (Rev). Clear Air Turbulence Forecasting Techniques. USAF, Feb 84.

AIM. Airman’s Information Manual, Official Guide to Basic Flight Information and ATC
Procedures. FAA, Jan 94.

AOPA PILOT, Carburetor Icing, April, 1988.

Appleman, H.S. Lightning Hazard to Aircraft, AWS/TR 179 (revised). USAF, Apr 71.

Armstrong, D. and C. Hill. Soar Sierra, Mountain Meteorology – Know Before You Go! 1976.

Atkins, N.T., and R.M. Wakimoto. Wet microburst activity over the Southeastern United States:
Implications for forecasting, Weather and Forecasting, 6, 470-482, 1991.

AWS/FM-90/001. New Stability Indices and Fog Forecasting Techniques. USAF, Feb 90.

AWS/TN-79/001. Clear Air Turbulence Forecasting Techniques (revised). USAF, 1984.

AWS/TR-80/001. Forecasters’ Guide on Aircraft Icing. USAF, AD-A085490, Mar 80.

AWS/TR 200. Notes on Analysis and Severe-Storm Forecasting Procedures of the Military
Weather Warning Center (Miller, R.C.), revised. USAF, May 72.
th
Barlow, W.R. A New Index for the Prediction of Deep Convection. Preprints, 17 Conference on Severe
Local Storms, St. Louis, MO, Amer. Meteor. Soc., 129-132, 1993.

Blanchard, D., Assessing the Vertical Distribution of Convective Available Potential Energy. Weather and
Forecasting, 13, 1998.

Blanchard, David. Normalized CAPE (NCAPE). Weather and Forecasting, Sept, 1998.

Bonner, W.J., Climatology of the low-level jet. Mon. Wea. Rev., 833-850, 1968.

Boyden, C.J. A Simple Instability Index for Use as a Synoptic Parameter. Met Mag Vol 92, Jul 63.

Bunkers, et al. Predicting SuperCell Motion Using a New Hodograph Technique,

Weather and Forecasting, Feb 2000.

Bunkers, M. J., B. A. Klimowski, and J. W. Zeitler, 2002: The importance of parcel choice and the
st
measure of vertical wind shear in evaluating the convective environment. Preprints, 21 Conf. on Severe
Local Storms, San Antonio, TX, Amer. Meteor. Soc., 379–382.
202

Bunkers, M. J. and D. A. Barber, et al. Choosing a Universal Mean Wind for Supercell Motion Prediction,
Journal of Operational Meteorology, Volume 2, Number 11 (2014).

Corby, G.A. and C.E. Wallington. Airflow Over Mountains: The Lee-Wave Amplitude.
Quarterly Journal of the Royal Meteorological Society, Vol 82, 1956.
Corfidi, S.F., J.H. Merritt and J.M. Fritsch. Predicting the Movement of Mesoscale Convective Complexes,
Weather and Forecasting, 11,41-46, 1996.

Corfidi, S.F. Cold Pools and MCS Propagation: Forecasting the Motion of Downwind-Developing MCSs,
Weather and Forecasting, 18, 997-1007, 2003.

Cornell, D., D.A. Donahue and C. Keith. A Comparison of Aircraft Icing Forecast Models.
USAF AFCCC/TN-95/004 (Air Force Combat Climatology Center), Dec 95.

Cotton, W.R. and R.A. Anthes, Storm and Cloud Dynamics, Academic Press, Inc., 559-564, 1989.

Cox, M.K. A Semi-Objective Technique for Forecasting Aircraft Icing Levels and Intensities, an
unpublished report, Det 2, 2nd Weather Group, May 59.

Devanas, A. and L. Stefanova. Statistical Prediction of Waterspout Probability for the Florida Keys.
Weather and Forecasting, Apr 18.

Doswell, C.A. III and E.N. Rasmussen. The Effect of Neglecting the Virtual Temperature
Correction on CAPE Calculations. Weather and Forecasting, Dec 94.

Fawbush, E.J. and R.C. Miller. A Method of Forecasting Hailstone Size at the Earth’s Surface.
Bull Amer Met Soc, Jun 53.

Feddes, R.G. A Synoptic-Scale Model for Simulating Condensed Atmospheric Moisture. USAFETAC TN
74-4, Jun 74
.
Foldvik, A. Two-Dimensional Mountain Waves - A Method for the Rapid Computation of Lee
Wavelengths and vertical velocities. Quart. J. Royal Met. Soc. Vol 88, 1962.

Foltz, H.P. Prediction of Clear Air Turbulence, an Atmospheric Science Paper No. 106,
Colorado State University. Jan 67.

Gilmore, M.S. and L.J. Wicker. The Influence of DCAPE on Supercell Dynamics.
th
Preprints, 18 Conference on Severe Local Storms, AMS, Feb, 1996.

Gultepe, Ismail. Visibility Parameterizations for Forecasting Applications. ICCP (International

Conference on Clouds and Precipitation). July 7-11, 2008.

Haines, D. Haines Index Application For AWIPS. Western Region Technical Attachment,
No. 00-08, August 8, 2000

Hampshire, Mosier, Ryan, Cavanaugh, 2017. Relationship of Low-Level Instability and Tornado Damage
Rating Based on Observed Soundings. Journal of Operational Meteorology, 6(1), 1-12.

Hardy, C., Ottmar, R.D., Peterson, J., Core, J. 2002. Smoke management guide for prescribed
and wildland fire -- 2000 edition. Boise, ID: National Wildfire Coordinating Group.

Hart, J.A. and J. Korotky. The SHARP Workstation (computer program), NOAA/NWS, Nov 91.

Holton, J.R. An Introduction to Dynamic Meteorology, Academic Press, 1972, pp.49-50.

203

Jefferson, G.J. A Modified Instability Index. Met Mag Vol 92, Mar 1963.

Jefferson, G.J. A Further Development of the Instability Index. Met Mag Vol 92, Oct 63.
Jefferson, G.J. Instability Index (A letter to the Editor). Met Mag Vol 95, Dec 66.

Johns, R.H. and C.A. Doswell III. Severe Local Storms Forecasting. Weather and Forecasting, Dec 92.

LaPenta, K.D. Preliminary Guidelines for Using Helicity, Buoyancy and the Energy-Helicity Index From the
SHARP Workstation, NOAA/NWS Forecast Office, Albany, NY. 1992.

Leftwich, P.W. On the Use of Helicity in Operational Assessment of Severe Local Storm
Potential. 16th Conf on Severe Local Storms, AMS, 1990.
Lewis, W. A Flight Investigation of the Meteorological Conditions Conducive to the Formation of Ice on
Airplanes, NACA Tech Note 1393, NACA Aug 47.
st
Lindsay, C.V. Handbook of Soaring Meteorology, 1 Edition, 1988.
1030 Colonial Meadows Way, Virginia Beach, VA 23454

Litynska, Z., Parfiniewicz, J., and Pinkowski, H.: The prediction of air mass thunderstorms and hails,
WMO, No. 450, 128-130, 1976.

Lyra, G. Uber den Einfluss von Bodenerhebungen auf die Stromung einer stabil geschichteten
Atmosphare. Beitr Phys Atmos, 26, 1940.

Lyra, G. Z.angew.Math.u.Mech., Berlin, 23, No. 1, 1943.

Maglaras, G.J., and K.D. LaPenta. Development of a forecast equation to predict the severity of
thunderstorm events in New York State. National Weather Digest vol. 21 No. 3, 1997.

McCann, D.W. WINDEX -- A New Index for Forecasting Microburst Potential. Weather and
Forecasting, Dec 94.

Mielke, K.B., and E.R. Carle, An Early Morning Dry Microburst in the Great Basin.
Weather and Forecasting, June 1987.

NOAA/NWS, Conceptual Models for Origins and Evolutions of Convective Storms, Advanced
Warning Operations Course, IC Severe 1, 2004.

NOAA/NWS, Forecasters’ Handbook No. 3. Soaring Meteorology for Forecasters, Sep 72.

Oliver, V.J. and M.B. Oliver, Weather Analysis from Single-Station Data. Handbook of Meteorology,
McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New York, 1945, pp. 858-879.

Pearson, R.O. Moisture Effects on Soaring Thermal Forecasts. Technical Soaring, Jul 95.

Pryor, K.L. The GOES Hybrid Microburst Index. Office of Research and Applications (NOAA/NESDIS).
Technical paper presented at the American Meteorological Society annual conference, Feb 2006.

Pryor, K.L. and G.P. Ellrod. WMSI – A New Index For Forecasting Wet Microburst Severity.
NOAA/NESDIS Office of Research and Applications Abstract, November 20, 2003.

Scorer, R.S. Theory of Waves in the Lee of Mountains. Quart J of Royal Met Soc, 75, 1949.

Sinclair, P.C. and P.M. Kuhn. Infrared Detection of High Altitude Clear Air Turbulence,
Naval Oceanographic and Atmospheric Research Laboratory, Tech Note 205, Dec 91.
204

Smith, R.D. Atmospheric Moisture Parameterization. USAFETAC TN 74-1, Jan 74.

Smithsonian Meteorological Tables. Sixth revised edition, No. 4014, 1951.

Sturtevant, J.S. The Severe Local Storm Forecasting Primer. Florence, AL. 1995.
ISBN 0-9650482-0-9

Thompson, R.L., R. Edwards, and C.M. Mead. An Update to the Supercell Composite and Significant
Tornado Parameters. Storm Prediction Center, Norman, OK. P 8.1.

U.S. Geological Survey (USGS) Topographic Maps. Obtain free state map catalogs from:
USGS Map Distribution
Box 25286
DFC, Building 810
Denver, CO 80225

VHF/UHF MANUAL (3rd edition), The Radio Society of Great Britain, 1976.

Wheeler, M. Verification and implementation of Microburst Day Potential Index (MDPI) and
Wind Index (WINDEX) forecasting tools at Cape Canaveral Air Station.
AMU Report, 24 pp., 1996.

Wheeler, M. 1997 MDPI results. AMU Memorandum, 4 pp., 1997.

Woodall, G.R. Qualitative Analysis and Forecasting of Tornadic Activity Using Storm-Relative
Environmental Helicity. NOAA Technical Memorandum, NWS SR-127, Jan 90.
205

27. INDEX.

Absolute Humidity, 79 RDX, 102

Acoustic sounding, 101 WMO Coded, 96
Advanced Export Mode, 24 Data Analyses, 119
AFGWC icing, 78 Data Editor, 104
Analyses Box, 64 data processing, 106
Anvil-Layer, 45 DCAPE, 83, 120, 121
Area-Map screen, 155 DCI, 109
auto-balance, 162 Delta Theta-e, 109
Auto-Update, 136 Desert mode, 81
Batch-Load, 158 diagnostic log, 62
Best Level, 82 DMP Gust, 71, 109
Boyden Index, 108 Doppler, 6, 1, 3, 76, 77, 103
BRN, 108 double mountains, 179
BUFR, 99 download data, 8, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21
bulk shear, 43 Downrush Temperature, 122
Bunkers, 80 dropsonde, 96
Bunkers Method, 126 Dry Adiabats, 68
CAP strength, 108 Dry Microburst Potential nomogram, 33
CAPE, 83, 119 DTG format, 86
CAPE..Hail, 83 ducting. See Refractivity
Carburetor icing, 123 dump data, 22
CAT, 26, 78, 127 Dust Storm, 35
CCL, 82, 83, 107 Edit
Classic data display, 70 locator file, 29
Cloud Depth Ratio, 33 mountain data, 29
Cloud Layer Table, 95 sounding data, 28
Cloud Water, 81 Effective Storm-Relative Helicity, 44, 80
clouds, 79 EHI, 81, 109
COAL, 117 EL, 84, 107
Compare Menu, 61 email, 18
composite sounding, 58 Encoders, 8
Contrail Threshold Line, 61 BUFKIT format, 10
BUFR format, 12
Contrails, 121
CSV format, 8
Convective Temperature. See Tc RAW format, 8
Corfidi vector. See MBE vector WMO format, 9
Coriolis parameter, 183 Energy Helicity Index. See EHI
Craven SigSvr Parameter, 108 Enthalpy, 81
Critical Angle, 42 ESRH, 44, 71, 80, 114
Cross Totals, 108 Export Mode, 85
cross winds, 145 Export Sounding Data, 22
Cross-Section Module, 135 File Mask, 164
CSV data format, 199 Filter sounding data, 29
Cursor Data, 64 Filter station data, 7
Custom Data Displays, 70 Fire Danger, 35
Custom View, 195 flooding, 109
D Value, 145 Fog Index, 92
DALR, 38 Fog Layer, 122
Data fog layers, 122
BUFR, 99, 101 Fog Point, 110
CSV, 96
Fog Probability, 35
GRIB, 3, 13, 99, 101
netCDF, 3, 101
Fog Table, 48, 52
Radiometrics, 102 Fog Threat, 110
RASS, 101 forecast soundings, 1, 4, 21, 99, 182, 191
Raw Data, 106 Freezing Fog, 123
206

Frost Point, 123 Lite program, 2

Froude Number, 170 LLWS, 125
FSI, 110 Low-Level Wind Shear. See LLWS
geostrophic wind shear, 182 LPL, 82, 107
GOES HMI, 71, 110 LWC, 8, 81, 124, 125
Gradient Editor, 161 LWP, 8, 117, 125
Hail, 83, 123 maximum surface temperature, 194
Hail/No Hail nomogram, 33 MBE vector, 39, 121
Haines Index, 110 MDPI, 112
harmonic waves, 172 Merge, 19, 58
Hazards Display, 57 Merge process, 58
Heat Burst Index, 111 Supplemental data, 58
Heat Stress, 35 METAR, 79
Heffter, 81 Microburst Day Potential Index. See MDPI
Height Correction Line, 61 mixing height, 106, 116, See DALR
helicity, 126 mixing layer, 116, See DALR
helicity contours, 39 MLCAPE, 50, 82
HI, 111 Mobil data, 96, 106
High CAT, 127 modules, 2
HMI. See GOES HMI Mountain Wave turbulence, 167
Hodogram diagram, 46 MPL, 83, 84, 107
Hodograph diagram, 39 MUCAPE, 50, 82, 126
Holzworth, 81 multi station forecast, 192
Humidity Index, 111 Multi-sounding scanner. See Soundingram
hypsometric, 106 Scanner
Ice Fog, 123 MVV, 112
Icing, 123, 124 NATO, 14
Carburetor Icing, 123 NCAPE, 120
Structural Icing, 124 netCDF, 3, 101
induction icing. See Carburetor icing Overlay Multiple Soundings, 61
Interactive Module, 38, 55 ozone, 96, 128, 147, 199
Interpolate a sounding, 155 password, 62
Inversions, 81, 124 PBL, 81
ISA Sounding, 61 Planetary Boundary Level. See PBL
IWV, 8, 117, 125 Pollution Potential, 35
JI, 111 positive shear, 43
K Index, 112 Precip Type nomogram, 34
KO Index, 112 Precipitable Water, 125
LASI, 110 precipitation, 79
Layer Analyzer display, 37 Precipitation Donut, 79
LCL, 107 Pressure/Height Values, 61
LFC, 83, 107 PVU, 125
LI, 112 Q method, 81
license, 3 RAOB Lite, 2
Lift Parcel, 55 RAOB.MTN, 29, 173
Lift Sounding, 55 RAOB.STN, 6, 168
Lifted Index, 112 RASS, 101
Lightning Potential, 125 RAW Data Format, 198
Liquid Water Content. See LWC Real-Time Display, 164
Listings Menu, 48 reference sounding, 61
CAPE Listing, 51 Refractivity, 81, 126
Compare Indices, 50 Refresh Menu, 60
Complete Listing, 48 Relative Humidity, 79
Data Analzses, 49
Restore Menu, 60
Interval Listing, 49
RHi, 80, 123
Severe Weather, 49
Summary Listing, 48 Ri, 112, 113
207

RICAPS, 34, 75, 79, 95 Thermogram, 34

rubber-band-zoom, 144 THI, 115
S Index, 113 Thickness Table, 34
Saturation Adiabats, 68 TI, 115
Saturation Mixing Ratios, 68 TKE, 78
saving data, 29 Toolbars
SBCAPE, 50, 82 Cross Section diagram, 145
SCP, 80, 114 Forecast soundings, 190
Severe Weather display, 33 Sounding diagram, 53
Severe Weather Parameter Table, 90, 92 Soundingram diagram, 128
Severity, 113 tornado formation, 36
shear. See wind shear Total Totals, 116
SHERB, 113 TQ Index, 116
SHIP, 114 trajectory diagram, 46
Ship data, 96, 106 Transport Wind, 116
Showalter Index, 113 Trigger Temperature, 181
SI, 113 Tropical Weather, 36
single station forecast, 191 tropopause, 107
SLAT, 127 ULII, 109
soaring, 47 Universal Mean Wind, 80, 126
Soaring, 47, 180, 182 Upper Level Instability Index, 33
Soaring Index, 181 UVW diagram, 66
sounding data display, 70 Ventilation Index, 116
Sounding Display, 30 Vertical Totals, 116
Sounding Scanner, 31 VGP, 81, 117
Soundingram Module, 128 Virtual Temperature, 83
Soundingram Scanner, 130 Vorticity Generation Parameter. See VGP
Split Screen, 160 VTP, 7, 44, 71, 80, 117
Stability Bars, 64 Warm Cloud Depth. See WCD
STANAG, 14 waterspout, 117
Storm Category chart, 33, 49 Waterspout Index, 117
Storm Character nomogram, 33 wave decay, 176
Storm Motion, 126 WBZ, 107, 123
Storm Motion vector, 39 WCD, 109, 117
STP, 7, 44, 71, 80, 114 WCT, 118
Stull, 81 Weather Alert Editor, 88
sub-surface area, 64 Weather Alerts, 166
Super Meteogram, 197 Weather Symbols, 160
Supercell Composite Parameter. See SCP Wet Fog, 123
Surface Line, 64 widescreen, 6, 53, 65, 74
SWEAT Index, 114 Wind Bar, 64
SWI, 117, 118 Wind Chill, 35
Szilagyi, 83, 117, 118 Wind Plot Box, 64
1
T Gust, 115 wind shear, 64, 81, 127, 167
2
T Gust, 115 wind shear vector. See wind shear
Tc, 121 WINDEX, 118
TCTP, 116 Winter Weather display, 34
Thermal Index, 181 WMSI, 118
Thermal Turbulence, 127 Zoom Menu, 60
thermal wind, 182, 183, 187, 191